1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-5, Model Year 2004
Safety
11
Security 39
Instruments and controls 53
Saab 9-5 Audio System 85
OnStar - Telematics 107
Interior equipment and trunk 119
Starting and driving 147
Car care and technical information 199
Customer Assistance and Information 263
Specifications 269
Index 283
©
Saab Automobile AB 2003
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Instrument panel
Indicator and warning lights______
Speedometer_________________
Odometer and trip meter ________
Fuel gauge___________________
Temperature gauge ____________
54
61
60
61
61
Saab Information Display (SID) ___
Night panel___________________
Clock _______________________
63
67
68
Parking lights____________ 69
High/low beam __________ 69
Daytime running lights_____ 69
Instrument illumination ____ 71
Changing bulbs__________ 215
Hazard warning lights_____
72
Wipers and washers______
Rear-window wiper (9-5
73
74
Turn signal and lane change
Wagon) _______________
indicators ______________ 71
High beam flasher________ 69
Cruise control ___________ 167
Wipers and washers______ 213
Front fog lights (certain mod-
els)___________________ 72
Saab 9-5 Audio System ___
Steering-wheel controls ___ 102
85
Steering-wheel controls ___ 102
Sentronic, manual mode ___ 163
Automatic climate control
(ACC) ________________
75
Air conditioning (ACC) ____ 252
Electric heating, front seats______
Ventilated front seats___________
15
15
Ashtrays (accessory)___________ 131
Cigarette lighters (accessory) ____ 132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Exterior
Driving with a roof rack load______ 183
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory) 183
Maximum roof load ____________ 270
Rearview mirror _______________ 122
Hood _______________________ 200
Engine compartment: washing ___ 255
Sunroof ________________ 128
Washing the car _________ 254
Waxing and polishing _____ 255
Touching up the paint _____ 255
Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 256
Headlights _____________
High/low beam __________
Turn signal and lane change
indicators______________
Headlight washers (certain
models) _______________
69
69
71
73
Changing bulbs _________ 215
Headlights______________ 69
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan 220
Rear lights clusters, 9-5
Wagon ________________ 222
Changing bulbs__________ 215
Central locking __________
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan __
Tailgate, 9-5 SportWagon__
Child safety locks ________
Car alarm ______________
40
44
45
43
46
Towing a trailer __________ 178
Towing the car___________ 188
Rear towing eye _________ 189
Trunk _______________________ 135
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan __ 135
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon _ 138
Trunk Release Handle__________ 144
Spare wheel and tools__________ 145
Compact spare tire ____________ 246
b
Fuel gauge___________________
61
Tires pressure ________________ 279
Wheels and tires ______________ 278
Braking______________________ 168
Driving in cold weather__________ 176
Compact spare tire_____________ 246
Changing a wheel _____________ 247
Fuel filler flap _________________ 153
Refueling ____________________ 154
Economical motoring___________ 174
Fuel ________________________ 272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Interior
Interior lighting________________ 130
Sunroof _____________________ 128
Dome light, front ______________ 225
Rearview mirrors ______________ 121
Door mirrors__________________ 121
Sun visors ___________________ 131
Steering wheel adjustment _ 120
Airbag _________________ 31
Power steering fluid_______ 209
Steering-wheel controls ___ 102
Sentronic, manual mode ___ 163
Safety belts ____________
Airbag_________________
Child safety ____________
Child safety locks ________
17
31
23
43
Safety belts ____________ 253
Seats__________________ 12
Electric heating, front seats_ 15
Ventilated front seats______ 15
Safety belts _____________ 17
Child safety _____________ 23
Folding the rear seat, 9-5
Glove compartment ______ 132
Sedan ________________ 135
Folding the rear seat, 9-5
Wagon ________________ 138
Upholstery and trim_______ 253
Side airbags ____________ 35
Manual transmission _____ 158
Automatic transmission ___ 159
Electric windows ______________ 127
Ignition switch ________________ 148
Starting the engine ____________ 149
Engine Break-In Period _________ 157
Driving in hot weather __________ 177
Driving in cold weather _________ 176
Parking _____________________ 196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Engine compartment
Engine ______________________ 203
Checking the oil level___________ 204
Changing engine oil____________ 204
Engine oil, specification_________ 273
Braking______________________ 168
ABS brakes __________________ 169
Brake and clutch fluid___________ 208
Brake system _________________ 277
Brake pads___________________ 277
Warning labels __________
7
V.I.N. number ___________ 280
Engine number __________ 280
Gearbox number _________ 280
Color code______________ 280
Fuses _________________ 227
Changing a fuse_________ 229
Relays ________________ 230
Table of fuses___________ 227
Power steering fluid_______ 209
Steering, technical data ___ 277
Temperature gauge ______
61
Driving in hot weather_____ 177
Driving in cold weather____ 176
Coolant________________ 207
Coolant capacity_________ 272
Ignition switch ___________ 148
Drive belts______________ 212
Spark plugs_____________ 275
Catalytic converter _______ 152
Wipers and washers______
73
Washers_______________ 214
Washer jets ____________ 214
Important considerations for driving 151
Turbo unit ___________________ 201
Engine, technical data__________ 272
Manual transmission ___________ 158
Automatic transmission _________ 159
Automatic transmission,
technical data ________________ 276
Manual gearbox, technical data___ 276
Jump starting _________________ 191
Battery ______________________ 210
Charging/replacing the battery____ 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
A/C system
Warning labels
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before
discharging the A/C system. Improper service methods
may cause personal injury. System to be serviced by
authorized personnel only. For instructions consult
workshop manual.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Charge: 825 g of R134a.
Radiator fan
Compressor oil: PAG oil SP-10 alt.
Saab oil 4759106
Radiator fan may start at any
time.
Oil amount: See workshop manual.
Brake fluid
CLEAN FILLER CAP BEFORE
REMOVING. USE ONLY DOT 4
FLUID FROM SEALED
CONTAINER.
• AVOID SPARKS AND OPEN FLAMES,
NO SMOKING
• WEAR EYE PROTECTION
• KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
• ACID
• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
• FLAMMABLE GAS
Battery
• No sparks, flames or smoking.
• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns.
• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast.
• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery.
Coolant:
Never open when engine hot!
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Jack
•
•
•
Jack is designed only for changing a tire or
mounting tire snow chains.
Vehicle must be level and the jack must be
placed on a firm and level ground.
Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is
jacked up.
Contacta Saabdealerifa
xenon headlight requires
replacement.
Thislabelisonlyfoundon
cars with xenon head-
lights.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to
park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to
be changed (See illustration).
3 Crank jack so that car begins to lift.
4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel
bolts one-half turn.
CANADA
5 Raisevehiclesothattireclearsground. Loosen
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
6 Mountsparewheelandtightenboltsenoughso
wheel is not loose.
7 Lower car. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross
sequence.
USA
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur.
• Children 12 and under can be killed by the air bag
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front
• Sit as far back as possible from the air bag
• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS
Jack
Use on level ground only. Use vehicle support stands. Safe
working load 900 kg (1900 lbs).
For more information see your owner´s manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Examples of symbols that can be found in your car
No sparks,
flames or
smoking.
Windshield
wipers
Coolant
Buckle up
Airbag
Headlights
Radiator fan
Fuel
temperature
Useprotective
goggles
Direction
indicators
Windshield
washers
Battery
charging
Keep out of
reach of
children.
Electric
windows
Parking lights
Defroster
Foot brake
Battery acid
contains
sulfuric acid.
Deactivating
ofrearwindow
switches
Hazard
warning lights
Rear window
heating
Coolant level
Refer to the
Owner’s
Manual.
Central
locking, lock
Front fog
lights
Engine oil
pressure
Ventilation fan
Central
locking,
unlock
Risk of
explosive gas.
Rear fog
light
ABS brakes
Trunk
lid/tailgate,
opening
Never place a
rear-facing
child seat in
this seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
(This page has been left blank)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Safety
The following seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving
position:
Seats
WARNING
• height
• legroom
The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Bear this in mind when adjusting
the seat, and make sure that nothing gets
caught and damaged. Ensure that noth-
ing can be trapped when adjusting the
seat.
• backrest rake angle
• lumbar support
• head-restraint height
We recommend that adjustments to the
driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
Bear in mind that children can be injured
if they play with the electrically-operated
seats.
1 height
2 legroom
Alwaysremovetheignitionkeywhenyou
leave the car to prevent personal injury
caused by the electrically adjustable
seats, for example, due to children play-
ing.
3 seat tilt angle
4 backrest rake angle
Lastly, adjust the steering wheel (see page
120).
Height
To raise the seat, lift the lower control
straight up.
To lower the seat, press the lower control
down.
The same control can be used to adjust the
height of the frontand rear edgesoftheseat
independently.
Both front seats are electrically operated.
On certain models the driver´s seat is
equipped with a memory function.
To facilitate getting into the car, both seats
can be adjusted when either of the front
doors is open.
For safety reasons, if the door is closed, the
seat can only be adjusted when the ignition
is ON.
Note, however, that both seats can be
adjusted for 30 seconds after both doors
have been closed.
WARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat except
when the car is stationary.
Side airbags
(see page 35).
Head restraint
(see page 16).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
13
Legroom adjustment
To adjust the legroom, push the lower
control forward or back.
Backrest rake angle
To adjust the backrest, move the upper
control forward or back.
Lumbar support
Turn the smaller wheel for stepless adjust-
ment of the lumbar support.
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash and in particular a rear-end colli-
sion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Safety
To recall the programmed settings, press
the appropriate preset button, whereupon
the seat and mirrors will be adjusted auto-
matically.
To change the settings stored in a preset
button, adjusttheseatandmirrorsasbefore
and save the new settings by pressing M
and the appropriate preset button.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger side
door mirror can be tilted down automati-
cally, e.g. to show the curb. To do this,
select reverse and press the tiny button
adjacent to the door-mirror control. When
you deselect reverse, the mirror will return
to its original setting automatically (see
page 121).
Programmable driver’s seat (certain
models only)
In certain models the driver´s seat is
equipped with a programmable memory
function. This function also includes the
door mirrors.
Adjust the seat and door mirrors.
To save the settings, press and hold the M
button and, at the same time, press one of
the preselect buttons (1, 2 or 3). The Saab
Information Display (SID) will chime to
confirm that the settings have been saved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
15
Ventilated front seats
(option)
Ventilated front seats, that enhance seating
comfort in hot weather, is an option on Arc
and Aero models (certain markets).
Ventilated seats are equipped with two fans
that extract the moist air from between the
seat and the body.
Electric heating, front seats
Both front seats have adjustable and ther-
mostat-controlled heating of the seat cush-
ion and backrest, available as an option.
Heating is adjustable in three stages. In
position 0 it is turned off.
The fans have three speeds and are OFF
when the switch is set to 0.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Safety
Head restraint
WARNING
• Adjust the head restraint so that your
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
• Raise the head restraints in the seat
that are occupied.
The front seats in the Saab 9-5 are
Rear-seat head restraints
9-5 Sedan: The rear head restraints have
three adjustment positions for passenger
comfort.
They can also be folded down to increase
the driver’s rearward visionwhen the seat is
unoccupied.
9-5 SportWagon: The height of the rear
head restraints can be adjusted by depress-
ing the catch on the left-hand collar in the
same way as the front head restraints.
equipped with Saab Active Head Restraints
(SAHRs). Thesereduce the risk ofwhiplash
injury if the car is hit from behind.
The head restraint can be raised or lowered
and is adjustable in various positions.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraint forward and upward, thus
limiting the backward movement of the
head.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
atedbybodyweight.Themechanismisbuilt
into the top of the backrest, where it is
connected to the head restraint.
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Lowering:pressthecatchontheleft-hand
sideoftheattachingpointandpressdown
the head restraint.
Therefore, the SAHR does not need to be
replaced after a minor rear-end crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
17
Safety belts
WARNING
WARNING
In the event of a crash, the rear-seat
passengers not wearing a seatbelt will
thrown forward against the front-seat
backrests. The stresses imposed on the
front seat passengers and belts are multi-
plied and can result in needless injury or
even death for all car occupants.
Safety belts must be worn at all times by
all car occupants.
FASTEN BELTS
Child safety, see page 23.
Check that the locking tongue is properly
locked in the belt lock.
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are
provided for all seats.
Research has established that it is just as
dangerous for rear seat passengers not to
wear their safety belts as it is for front seat
passengers.
WARNING
Safety-belt reminder
Whentheignitionisswitchedon, the”fasten
belts” reminder will light up until the driver
fastens the safety belt. In addition an audi-
ble signal sounds for 6 seconds, or until the
driver fastens his belt.
Adjustments of the safety belt should be
done when the car is stationary so that
attention to traffic is not reduced.
Bearinmindthat incertainstates it is alegal
requirement for all occupants of the car to
wear a safety belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Safety
Safety belt pretensioners
The belts of the front seats are fitted with
automatic pretensioners and force limiters.
These are activated in the event of a severe
frontal or rear-end crash and a side-on colli-
sion, providedthatthesafetybeltsarebeing
worn.
The pretensioners serve to reduce the
forward movement of the body by tension-
ing the belt. The force limiters reduce belt
loads on the body by "loosening" the safety
belt to absorb the body’s kinetic energy as
gradually as possible.
WARNING
Proper positioning of the safety belt is
extremely important. An out of position
safety belt can result in the wearer sliding
underneath the belt in a crash (submarin-
ing) and injury can result from the lap
portion cutting into the abdomen.
• Checktoensurethatthebeltisnottwisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
• There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn.
The safety belt pretensioners are not acti-
vated by vehicle rollover.
Correctly positioned safety belt
• Refrainfromtiltingthebackrestmorethan
necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in the
more upright position.
Correct position for safety belt
WARNING
• The lap portion of the belt should be
pulled as tightly as comfortable and as
low as possible across the hips, so that it
is just touching the top of the thighs. The
shoulder belt should be well in on the
shoulder but not touching the neck.
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other
components must be inspected by an
authorized Saab dealer and replaced as
necessary.
• Only one person per safety belt!
WARNING
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself. Visit an autho-
rized Saab dealer for any necessary
repairs.
If two people share a belt, they risk injury
by being crushed together in the event of
a crash.
• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
theretractorwillallowthewearerfreedom
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
applied hard or a crash occurs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
19
• Children who have grown out of a child
seat should be restrained by the car’s
standardthree-pointbelts.Makesurethat
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-
ion may be necessary.
WARNING
Never fasten the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind the body or pull the
belt off the shoulder and under the arm.
To fasten the belt
Press the red button to release the belt
Front safety belts
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt buckle, as illustrated.
See page 253 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
Then grip the belt at the shoulder, pull it out
and, without letting go, allow the slack to be
taken up by the reel. Make sure that the belt
is well in on the shoulder.
Because the lower belt-anchorage points
are on the seat, the belt buckle follows the
movement of the seat during seat adjust-
ment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Safety
Belt height adjustment
The front safety belts and the outside belts
in the rear (9-5 Sedan) are equipped with
automatic height adjustment.
After fastening the belt, grasp it at chest
height, pull it out and, without letting go,
allow the slack to be taken up by the reel.
Make sure that the belt is well in on the
shoulder.
Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lap belt should be placed low, across
the hips and over the upper thighs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
21
Securing an item on the rear seat
Safety belt, rear seat
The diagonal part should lie as far in on the
shoulder as possible.
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt lock.
See page 253 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
Safety belt, rear seat
Three-point safety belts are provided for all
three rear seat passengers.
Fasten the belt by pulling out the strap care-
fully and inserting the tongue in the lock.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Then grip the diagonal part of the strap near
the lock and pull the belt upwards towards
the shoulder to tighten the lap strap. The lap
strap should lie low over the hips.
WARNING
• Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 135).
• If a cargo has to be placed on a seat,
it must be properly secured with the
safetybelt. Thisreducestheriskof the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Safety
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
Each belt assembly must only be used by
one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt
around a child being carried on the occu-
pant´s lap.
WARNING
• Make sure you use the correct safety
belt buckle. The buckles for the center
and left-hand rear seats are close
together.
Safety belts are designed to bear upon
thebonystructureofthebody,andshould
be worn low across the front of the pelvis
or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section of the
belt across the abdominal area must be
avoided.
No modifications or additions should be
madebytheuserwhichwilleitherprevent
the safety belt adjustingdevice from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent the
safety belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
Safety belts should be adjusted as firmly
as possible, consistent with comfort, to
providetheprotectionforwhichtheyhave
been designed. A loose belt will greatly
reduce the protection afforded to the
wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamina-
tion of the webbing with polishes, oils and
chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out using
mild soap and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire assem-
bly after it has been worn in a severe
impact even if damage to the assembly is
not obvious.
Belts should not be worn with straps
twisted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
23
Car safety tips
Child safety
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
• Children must always be suitably
• Never leave children unattended in a
car, even for a short time.
– Children can suffer heat stroke – per-
haps die – in a matter of minutes.
– Children can put the car into gear and
hurt themselves or others.
Protect children from getting
trapped in the trunk of a car
restrained in the car.
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur.
• Teach childrennot toplay in or around
cars.
• Children12andunderor
shorter than 55 inches
(140 cm) can be killed by
the airbag.
• Watch children when loading or
unloading the car so they don’t get
locked in by mistake.
• At gas stations, take the keys from the
car while filling the tank.
• Always lock the doors and trunk of
your car, and keep the keys out of chil-
dren´s sight and reach.
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace
for children.
• Never allow children to climb on top of
– or under cars.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
• Always look for children before back-
ing your car out of a garage or drive-
way.
• Keep the rear fold-down seats closed
to help prevent kids from getting into
the trunk from inside the car.
the front.
• Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag.
• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
never let a car idle in the garage.
For Trunk Release Handle information see
page 44 and 144.
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILDREN RESTRAINTS.
• Supervise young children around
buckets of water while washing your
car. Small children can drown in a
short time in less than an inch of water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Safety
The same attention must be given to child
safety in the car as is given to adults.
Saab recommends rearward facing child
restraints.
Children travel most safely when properly
restrained, but restraints must be suitable
for the size of the child. Always follow the
child seat/booster cushion manufacturer´s
instructionswheninstallingthesedevicesin
your vehicle.
Make sure you are acquainted with the
legal requirements for seating children
in the car.
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
restraint in accordance with the manufac-
turer’s child seat instructions.
When fitting child seats in cars you must
always read the instructionssupplied by
the manufacturer.
LATCH
LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
for CHildren) consists of top tether and
lower anchorage (“ISOFIX”) for child
restraints in two outboard the rear seats.
ISOFIX are lower attachments located
where the seat and back cushions come
together. Top tethers are upper attach-
ments located on parcel shelf or torsion
beam, see page 27 and 28.
Saab recommends rearward facing child
restraints for children 3 and under.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
25
There are two bars attached to the car body
for each specially designed LATCH child
restraint. A small labelis locatedon the seat
to facilitate installing the child restraint. The
labelcontains acircleand arearwardfacing
child restraint.
LATCH installation
To facilitate the proper fitting of new
specially-designed child restraints, rigid
lower anchorages (ISOFIX) have been
installed to the vehicle that shall be used
with the top tether anchorages in the two
outboard rear seating positions. There is an
additional top tether anchorage for the
center rear seating position that is to be
used together with the safety belt.
1 Place the child restraint on the seat
cushion.
2 Press the child restraint rearward into
the space between the backrest and
cushion, lining up the restraint attach-
ment arms with the labels.
3 Follow the child restraint instructions to
confirm that both restraint arms are
properly attached to the bars.
4 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
anchorage and tighten according to the
restraint instructions, see page 27 and
28.
LATCH is a U.S./Canadian government
standard for an uniform method of fitting
child restraints without using the standard
safety belts. Onlycertain child restraintsare
equipped to utilize these rigid lower anchor-
ages behind where the seat cushion and
seat back come together. LATCH child
seats also utilize a top tether strap that is
found on some newer child seats that still
require installation with the standard safety
belts.
5 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that restraint is securely attached
at both the lower anchorage bars and
the top tether strap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Safety
Rigid 2-point lower attachment with top
tether
Semi-rigid 2-point lower attachment with
top tether
For the top tether, only use the strap
supplied with the child restraint.
Always follow the installation instructions
supplied with the child restraint.
The availability of LATCH child restraints
may be limited.
When fitting child seats in cars you must
always read the instructionssupplied by
the car seat manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
27
9-5 Sedan:
Child tether anchorages for forward
facing child car seats
1 Open the cover that is right behind the
child restraint. Make sure it locks.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
ages (ISOFIX) or the safety belts as
described in the child restraint mounting
instruction.
WARNING
4 Route the tether under the headrest.
5 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
6 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
Child tether anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf,
Saab 9-5 Sedan
7 Pull the child restraints to make a
second check that the restraints are
securely attached at both the lower
anchorages bars and the top tether
strap.
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
anchored according to Canadian and USA
laws.
If you have any questions regarding child
tether anchorages please contact your
Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Safety
9-5 SportWagon:
8 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
9 Pull the child restraints to make a
second check that the restraints are
securely attached at both the lower
anchorages bars and the top tether
strap.
1 Fold the backrest of the rear seat
forward, see page 135.
2 Fold the anchor that is right behind the
child restraint to its upright position.
3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
4 Raise the head restraint to its upper
position and then route the tether under
the head restraint.
WARNING
5 Attach the tether to the anchor.
6 Raise the backrest of the rear seat.
Make sure it locks properly.
7 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the safety belt or
lower anchorages (ISOFIX) as
Make sure the child-restraint anchorages
are folded all the way up or down other-
wise it can obstruct locking the rear seat
backrest.
Child tether anchorages, Saab 9-5 Sport-
Wagon
described in the child restraint mounting
instruction on the previous page.
It is not possible to route the tether through
the cargo net (accessory), if one is fitted.
Instead we recommend a cargo guard
(accessory).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
29
Lockable belt tongue
In fitting a child seat that is intended to be
secured in position by the lap portion of the
safety belt, make use of the locking function
of the buckle.
Locking the lap portion of the belt lessens
the risk that the seat will work loose while
the car is in motion.
Thebuttonforthelockingfunctionislocated
on the back of the buckle.
1 Position the child seat in the back of the
car.
2 To activate the locking function, move
the locking button on the tongue of the
belt to the position marked
”CHILD SEAT” (item 1 in the figure) in
order to activate the locking function.
Locking the lap belt
1 Locked
2 Unlocked
3 Secure the base of the child seat with
the lap portion of the safety belt in accor-
dance with the installation instructions
accompanying the child seat.
4 Grasptheshoulderpartofthesafetybelt
and pull it upwards to tighten the lap
portion against the child seat.
5 Check for correct locking function by
pulling on the lap portion of the belt. The
belt must not unreel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Safety
Installation of child restraint using the
standard safety belt
Child restraints that are approved for rear-
ward facing installation in the rear seat can
be positioned in any of the three rear places.
If you intend to install another make of child
restraint make sure that it is possible to fit it
in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING
A special accessory is available for lock-
ing the center armrest so that a child seat
can be installed in the middle seat. See
your Saab dealer for details.
When a rear-facing child seat is fitted in
the center position of the rear seat in the
Saab 9-5 Sedan the center armrest must
be secured in place with this strap. If this
is not done, the center armrest could
swing down in the event of a frontal crash
and cause injury to the child.
WARNING
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of this child
restraint system can cause your child to
strike the vehicle´s interior during a
sudden stop or crash.
Fitting the locking strap on the center
armrest, Saab 9-5 Sedan (not needed on
SportWagon).
The locking strap is standard equipment in
certain markets.
Saabrecommendsrearwardfacingchild
restraints up to 3 years.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
31
Note:
Airbag
The sensor reacts differently depending on
whether or not the front seatbelts on the
driver’s and passenger sides are used. Situ-
ations can therefore arise where only one of
It is also possible for only the seatbelt
pretensioners to be activated and for the
airbags to remain uninflated.
The entire process takes less than
0.1 second – literally, faster than the blink-
ing of an eye.
These airbags are triggered only by moder-
atetoseverefrontalornear-frontalcrashes.
Theywillnot be activatedbyminor front-end
impacts, rear-end or side impacts, or by the
car rolling over.
WARNING
To reduce risk of injury:
• Always wear your safety belt.
• Always adjust your seat so that you
are as far back as possible but still
able to operate the pedals and reach
the steering wheel and controls
comfortably.
Inflated airbag (driver side)
Inflation and deflation together take less than
0.1 second.
• Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) should always
travelintherearseatasthecarisfitted
with a passenger airbag.
When the system is triggered by impact of a
frontal crash, the airbags in the steering
wheelandpassengersideofthedashboard
areinflated, afterwhichtheydeflatethrough
vents in the back of the bags.
• Never fit a child seat in the front of the
passenger airbag.
The driver and passenger airbags are
so-called smart airbags. This means that
thesystemcompensatesforfactorssuchas
the force of the collision.
TheAIRBAGsystemcomprisesanairbagin
thesteeringwheel, afrontpassengerairbag
and side airbags in the front seats.
The system supplements the protection
provided by the safety belts to further
enhance the safety of the occupants.
If a fault is detected in the AIRBAG, the
AIR BAG warning light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on (see pages 56 and
36).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Safety
• Always sit with the whole of your back
incontactwiththebackrestoftheseat,
and with your seat as far back as is
practical.Otherwiseyouwillbethrown
back against the backrest when the
airbag inflates which could cause you
injury or death. The airbag needs
room in which to inflate.
• Fumes are generated by the chemical
reaction that inflates the airbag.
Because the dust/fumes can, in
certain cases, cause irritation to the
skin, the following measures should
be taken:
Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-
tion should be washed with clean
water and a mild soap as soon as
possible.
In the event of eye irritation, flush the
eyesthoroughlywithcleanwaterforat
least 20 minutes.
In case of persistent irritation, consult
a doctor.
• Never attach anything to the steering
wheel or passenger side of the instru-
ment panel, as this could result in
injury if the airbag should inflate. The
same applies to anything you might
haveinyourmouth, suchas apipe, for
instance.
Passenger airbag and driver’s airbag both
inflated
• Never rest your hands or forearms on
the steering-wheel center padding.
• Some components of the airbag will
be warm for a short time. In some
circumstances the airbag can cause
minor burns or abrasions to the body
when the airbag inflates/deflates.
• If the AIR BAG warning light does not
extinguish after the car has been
started, or comes on or flashes while
driving, have the car checked immedi-
ately by an authorized Saab dealer.
The warninglightcouldsignify that the
airbags may not inflate in a crash, or
they could even inflate without a
crash. See page. 56.
WARNING
• Even if the car is equipped with
AIRBAG, safety belts must still
always be worn by all occupants.
• To reduce the risk of head injuries in
the event of a crash, the headliner and
pillar trims incorporate energy absorb-
ing material. These areas must not be
modified in any way. Work on these
areas must only be carried out at an
authorized Saab dealer.
• Note that because an airbag inflates
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
not provide protection against a
second impact occurring in the same
incident. Always use your safety belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
33
Moment of impact.
3
5
4
5
2
6
7
6
The sensors detect
deceleration and send
a signal via the cen-
tral sensor to the gas
generator that inflates
the airbag.
7
1
2
AIRBAG system with belt pretensioners
1 Central sensor
2 Belt pretensioners (for both front safety belts)
3 Steering wheel with integral airbag
4 Passenger airbag
The inflating airbag
cushions the driver.
5 Side-airbag sensor
6 Side airbag
7 Front sensors
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash.
Airbag now fully
inflated.
The airbag starts to
deflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
Safety
Front passenger seat
• Neverplaceanythingonthedashorin
frontoftheseatas, in additiontobeing
a hazard to passengers, this could
interferewiththe function of the airbag
in the event of a crash. The same
appliestothemountingofaccessories
on the dash.
WARNING
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur.
• Children12andunderor
shorter than 55 inches
(140 cm) can be killed by
the airbag.
WARNING
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
the right front seat of a car equipped with
apassengerairbag. Inflationof theairbag
in the event of a crash could seriously
injure or kill a child.
• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
up on the fascia, on the seat or out of
the window.
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace
for children.
• Do not carry anything in your lap.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.
The airbags are interconnected and have a
common warning light. The passenger
airbag moduleis housedinthefascia above
the glove compartment and is marked ”SRS
AIRBAG”. (SRS =Supplementary Restraint
System).
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
• Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag.
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS.
• Never allow a child to stand in front of
the seat or to sit on the lap of a
front-seatpassenger.Seriousinjuryor
death could result if the airbag is
inflated in a crash.
• The glove compartment must be
closed while travelling. An open glove
compartment door could cause leg
injuries in the event of a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
35
The side airbags, which help protect the
upper body are integrated in the outside
edges of the front seat backrests.
In a side impact, only the airbag on that side
will be activated, and only then if certain
predetermined conditions are met such as
the force and angle of the impact, the speed
of the car on impact, and at which point on
the car’s side the impact occurs.
The sensors, which are fitted in the front
doors, sense the rise in pressure caused by
the door panel being pressed in during an
impactcondition. Thesideairbagtriggerwill
be commanded based on the characteris-
tics of this pressure rise.
Side airbags
• Improvement of the anticorrosion
treatment of the doors should only be
carried out by an authorized Saab
dealer. Otherwise there is a risk that
the side impact sensor and the mois-
ture barrier in the front door could be
damaged.
WARNING
• The side airbags will inflate only in the
event of a side impact; not in the event
of a front or rear-end crash or of the
car’s rolling over.
• This car is equipped with side airbags
and no extra interior trim should be
fitted. Failure to observe this warning
could result in the side airbags not
inflating as intended and thus not
providing the intended protection
either.
• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
the seat seam, in the area of the side
airbag must immediately be repaired
by an authorized Saab dealer.
• Neverplaceanyobject in thearea that
would be occupied by the inflated
airbag.
• Do not modify the speaker installation
in the front doors or install speakers
other than those specifically approved
by Saab.
• For optimum protection, sit upright in
the seat, withyour safetybelt correctly
fastened.
• The sensors for the side airbags are
fitted in the front doors. We advise
against doing any work on the doors
thatcouldaffectthemoisturebarrierin
the door or the airbag sensors. It is
essential that the moisture barrier
(thick plastic film) in the front door is
not damaged in any way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Safety
AIR BAG warning light
WARNING
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbagsystem may not be working
properly. See page. 56. The airbags
in your vehicle may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate with-
out a crash.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if theair bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
Side airbag inflated
Side airbag components
1 Side airbag
2 Sensor
3 Moisture barrier
4 Text on seat
AIRBAG servicing
The AIRBAG must be inspected as part of
the normal service program but otherwise
may be regarded as maintenance-free.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
37
How do I position the seat to leave room for
the airbag to inflate?
Scrapping or working on airbags
and belt pretensioners
Frequently asked questions on func-
tion of airbags
Do you still need to wear a safety belt if
airbags are fitted?
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
Recline the seat back to increase the
distance between you and the airbag. For
short drivers, special accessory pedal
extensions are available through your Saab
dealer.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
great force – to be fast enough to protect an
adult in the seat.
WARNING
Yes, always! The airbag merely supple-
ments the car’s normal safety system.
Moreover, theairbagwillonlybeactuatedin
a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, which means, of course, that it
provides no protection in minor frontal
crashes, major rear-end or side-on crashes
or if the car rolls over.
The safety belts help reduce the chance of
thecaroccupantsfrombeingthrownaround
and injured or killed inside the car.
But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
will make the optimum contact with the
occupant, i.e. squareonfromthefront. If the
occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-
tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.
• Under no circumstances should any
modifications be made that affect the
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-
cal circuitry.
• Before starting any welding work on
the car, always disconnect the nega-
tive (–) battery lead and cover the
conductor.
When do the front airbags inflate?
Theairbagwillonlybeinflatedundercertain
predetermined conditions in a moderate to
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
depending on such factors as the force and
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
impact, andtheresistancetodeformationof
the impacting object.
The airbag canonly beactivatedonce in the
same incident.
Do not attempt to drive the car after an
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-
ble.
• Airbags and belt pretensioners must
be deployed under controlled condi-
tions before the car is scrapped or any
of the system’s components are
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-
ers that have been deployed as a
result of a crash must be replaced by
new ones.
In addition, airbags provide no protection
against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
times.
• Airbag-system components must
neverbetransferredforuseinanother
vehicle.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
room to inflate.
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
fully in order to protect an adult person,
before they are thrown forward, in a serious
frontal crash.
• All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must only be carried out by
knowledgeable personnel.
• The headlining and roof pillar trim
mustnotbemodifiedinanyway. Work
on these areas must only be carried
out at a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Safety
What won’t trigger the front airbags?
Arethesmokeandfumesgivenoffwhenthe
airbag operates at all harmful?
What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
light comes on?
The airbag will not be activated in all
front-end crashes. For instance, if the car
hashitsomethingrelativelysoftandyielding
(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid
object at a low impact speed, the airbag will
not necessarily be triggered.
Most people who have remained in a car
with little or no ventilation for several
minutes complained only of minor irritation
of the throat and eyes. Avoid as far as possi-
blegettingdustonyourskinasthereisarisk
of skin irritation.
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
bring on an attack, in which case you should
follow the normal procedure advised by
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
doctor afterwards.
If the warning lightis on, it means that a fault
has been detected in the system. The
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
intended and it might even be activated
erroneously. You should therefore take the
car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.
How loud is the inflation?
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
but it is very short-lived and will not damage
your hearing. For a short time afterwards
you could experience a buzzing noise in
your ears.
Most people who have experienced it
cannot remember the noise of the inflation
at all – all they remember is the noise of the
crash.
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
passenger airbag is installed?
Definitely not!
Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the
airbag.
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for
children.
NEVER put a child seat in the front.
Sit as far back as possible from the air bag.
Always use safety belts and child restraints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
39
Security
Doors _________________ 40
Central locking _________ 40
Car alarm ______________ 46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
Security
Key / Remote control
The key unit consists of a mechanical key
with integrated remote control.
The mechanical key is used for manual
locking and unlocking.
The remote control is used for remote lock-
ing and unlocking.
Doors
1
2
Door handles
Pull the handle to open the door.
If the door is stuck (e.g. if frozen), hold the
handle from above to secure a better grip.
Central locking
The key fits all the car’s locks.
The key supplied with the car has a code
number on a black plastic tag that needs to
be quoted for ordering additional keys. You
should therefore make a careful note of the
number.
The key contains a unique electronic code
for your car. When the key is inserted in the
ignition, the code is checked. If it matches,
the car can be started.
WARNING
3
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
Key / Remote control
1 To lock
2 To unlock
3 Opening the trunk (9-5 Sedan)
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportWagon)
Your car is supplied with two keys. It is pos-
sible to have up to four keys for a car at one
time. If you loose one key you should have
this replaced as soon as possible by con-
tactingyourSaabdealer.Whenthenewkey
is programmed into the system, the missing
key is automatically erased.
NOTE: For this reason, we strongly advise
you to take two keys with you on long jour-
neys and to keep them separate. If all keys
arelost, itwillbenecessarytoreplacecostly
electronic components as well as the keys.
This loss and replacement cost is not cov-
ered by the new car warranty.
If an additional key is to be added, all of the
original keys must be brought to the dealer
so that the control module can ”learn” to rec-
ognize the new components.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
41
Locking/unlocking the car
When the car is locked and unlocked the
theft alarm is also affected.
NOTICE
The key contains delicate electronics.
• Do not expose it to water.
• Avoid rough handling.
Remote locking (1)
Press
once on the control: all doors
locked.
The hazard warning lights will flash once.
The tailgate cannot be opened now from
• Do not place the key where it may be
subjected to high temperatures, e.g.
on the instrument panel.
• The key may malfunction if it becomes
very cold. Warm it in your hands for a
couple of minutes.
Remote unlocking (2)
Press
once on the control: the driver´s
Locking/unlocking by remote control.
• Never open the key. For changing the
battery, see page 43.
unlock the rest of the doors.
1 To lock
2 To unlock
The hazard warning lights will flash twice.
If remote unlocking should fail to work
Unlock the driver’s door with the key. To
silencethealarm, insert the key into theigni-
tion switch and turn it to the ON position.
To check the number of keys that are pro-
grammed for the car; see page 50.
Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic starting interlock is acti-
vated and the car is thus immobilized, see
also page 47.
The car can now be started. Contact your
local Saab dealer to have the system
checked and rectified.
Reprogramming lock system
functions
Certain lock system functions can be repro-
grammed by your authorized Saab dealer;
see page 282.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Security
WARNING
Theremotecontrolalsoworksfrominside
the car. Therefore, hold the key in such a
way that the buttons are not unintention-
ally pressed when the key is turned, or
inserted or removed from the ignition
switch.
1
2
Otherwise, the doors may be unintention-
ally locked or the tailgate unlocked. On
Sedan models, the trunk may even be
opened.
Locking/unlocking by key
1 To lock
Switch for operation of central locking
The central locking can also be operated
2 To unlock
Locking by key (1)
When the car is locked and unlocked the
theft alarm is also affected.
Turn the key clockwise: all doors locked.
Thetrunk lid/tailgatecannotbeopened now
from inside using the switch on the driver’s
door.
from inside the car by means of the
switch on the center console.
• To lock all doors: press the symbol side of
the switch once.
• To unlock the driver´s door: press the
switch once.
• To unlock all doors: press the switch
twice.
This switch is inoperative when the car is
locked from the outside using the remote
control.
Unlocking by key (2)
Turn the key counterclockwise once: the
driver´s door will unlock.
Turn the key counterclockwise twice: all
doors, but not trunk lid/tailgate, unlocked.
The interior locking buttons on each door
affect only the respective door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
43
If the car is left with the doors open, the inte-
rior lighting and the courtesy lights in the
doorswillbeswitchedoffautomaticallyafter
20 minutes, to prevent a flat battery. In such
casestheelectricallyoperatedseatswillnot
function.
Changing the key battery
When the battery voltage in the key falls
below a predetermined level the Saab Infor-
mation Display (SID) will issue the following
message: ”Remote control battery low.
Replace battery.”. Press the CLEAR button
on the SID to acknowledge this message.
You must then replace the battery without
delay to avoid malfunctions. The life of the
battery is normally 4 years.Contact a Saab
dealer to have the battery replaced.
WARNING
Having the doors locked when you are
driving will reduce the likelihood of:
• Passengers, especially children,
opening doors and falling out of the
car.
Child safety lock on rear doors
• Intruders entering the car when it is
moving slowly or at a standstill.
Child safety locks
• Injury resulting from a door bursting
open in the event of a crash.
The rear doors are equipped with child
safety locks that are operated by means of
a catch adjacent to the door lock.
However, you must also remember that
locked doors can hamper rescuers in the
event of a crash.
Insertakeyandturnthecatch45° clockwise
or counterclockwise as indicated by the
label on the door.
When the child safety catch is in the locked
position, the door cannot be opened from
the inside.
WARNING
If small children are carried in the rear
seat, the safety locks on rear doors
should be activated to prevent uninten-
tional opening from the inside.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
Security
Unlocking
The trunk lid is unlocked using:
• The
button on the key
• The trunk lid switch on the inside of the
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at
a standstill)
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-
tion indicators flashing three times.
The trunk lid switch on the driver’s door is
inoperative when the car is locked.
Locking
The trunk lid release is locked automatically
when closed.
Trunk lid switch
Trunk Release Handle
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan
Trunk Release Handle
The trunk lid lock is independent of the cen-
tral-locking system. The trunk lid release
switch on the driver’s door is inoperative
when the car is locked from the outside or
moving at a speed greater than 2.7 mph
(4 km/h).
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from the inside.
NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as a an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
45
Locking
The tailgate is locked using:
Tailgate, 9-5 SportWagon
The tailgate is not unlocked when the other
car doors are unlocked. The tailgate button
on the driver’s door is inoperative when the
car is locked or moving at a speed greater
than 2.7 mph (4 km/h).
• The
• The
button on the key
button on the centre console
Unlocking
• The key in the driver’s door.
The tailgate is unlocked using:
• When vehicle speed exceeds 2 mph
(4 km/h).
• The
button on the key
• The tailgate switch on the inside of the
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at
a standstill)
Grab handle
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-
tion indicators flashing three times.
NOTICE
Use the grab handle to close the tailgate.
Avoid the following, due to the risk of lock
mechanism damage when the tailgate is
closed.
• Never grasp the lock mechanism as
this can lock the mechanism.
• Never close the lock mechanism man-
ually.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
Security
If a door or the trunk lid/tailgate or hood has
been left open when the car is locked, the
LED on the fascia will flash (three times per
second) for ten seconds to indicate this.
Check to ensure that all the doors, plus
trunk lid/tailgate and hood, are closed prop-
erly.
If the fault persists (LED flashing when
renewed attempt made to activate the car
alarm by remote control), lock the car using
the key instead. The car alarm will not have
been activated and you should get in touch
with an authorized Saab dealer.
To avoid inconvenience caused by the
alarm being triggered inadvertently, make
sure that anyone else using the car is famil-
iar with how both the car alarm and the lock-
ing system work.
Car alarm
1
2
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
The car alarm (anti-theft system) is acti-
vated/deactivated when the car is
locked/unlocked by the remote control or by
the key, see page 41.
The antenna for the alarm system is located
in the center console.
3
Remote control
1 Activate/lock
2 Deactivate/unlock
3 Unlock trunk/tailgate
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportWagon)
All the doors plus trunk lid/tailgate and hood
are monitored by microswitches.
If the alarm is tripped (the direction indica-
tors are flashingandthe hornis on) it can be
turned off by unlocking the car using the
Your Saab 9-5 is equipped with an Elec-
tronic starting interlock (immobilizer), see
page 47 for details.
button.
Thecaralarmisarmed10 secondsafterthe
car has been locked by the remote control.
During this ten-second delay period, the
doors, trunk lid/tailgate and hood may still
be opened without the alarm being trig-
gered.
The LED indicator on the instrument panel
fascia will be on continuously during this
period, attheendofwhichitwillstart toflash
(once every other second).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
47
Activating the car alarm
Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
When the key is inserted in the ignition, a
signal is sent to the receiver. If the signal is
verified, the engine can be started.
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic immobilizer is activated.
This means that the car cannot be started
without the correct key inserted in the igni-
tion and the immobilizer thus deactivated.
If a fault is detected (e.g. in the transmitter)
”Key not accepted. Contact service.” will
appear on the Saab Information Display
(SID).
Alarm signals
The car alarm cannot be activated if the
driver’s door is open or if the ignition switch
is in ON position.
When the car alarm is armed, it will be trig-
gered if any door, or the trunk lid or hood, is
opened.
If, on the other hand, one of the other doors
or the trunk or hood is open or opened and
not closed again during the 10-seconds
delay period, it will be excluded from the
alarm function.
If it is then closed, a new delay period of ten
seconds will start, and the door (or trunk or
hood) will once again be secured by the
alarm system.
As usual, the LED will be on continuously
during the new delay period and will start to
flash once every other second after the
10-seconds period has elapsed.
Thealarmwillalsobetriggeredifanattempt
is made to bypass or short-circuit the igni-
tion switch, or to disconnect the battery.
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
signals will be set off:
• Flashing of hazard warning lights for five
minutes.
• Horn wailing for 30 seconds.
The alarm signals will stop if the alarm is
deactivated (car unlocked) during the alarm
period.
In this case, you can still start the car if you
turn the ignition key to ON and press one of
the buttons on the key (providing that the
receiver gets the right signal from the key).
Takethe cartoanauthorizedSaabdealer to
have the system checked.
The LED double-flashes when the car is
immobilized.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
Security
Panic-function
In the car alarm system is a function called
"Panic-function".
To activate panic function:
• Push and hold one of the buttons on the
key for 2 seconds. Or, if you are sitting
inside the car, push the LOCK-switch on
the center console for 2 seconds.
These actions will trigger the alarm (hazard
warning lights and horn).
To deactivate panic function:
• Push one of the buttons on the key, push
the LOCK-switch in the center console,
turn the key in the driver´s door or turn the
ignition to ON.
Whenthepanic-functionis activated the car
will be locked/unlocked depending upon
which button was pushed.
When the ignition is ON the panic-function
cannot be activated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
49
Overview of functions
Battery for key The battery for the key will normally have a life of
4 years. When the battery needs changing,
”Remote control battery low. Replace battery.”
will appear on the Saab Information Display
(SID).
Locking/
activation
Hazard warning lights flash once.
The LED will come on for 10 seconds.
Unlocking/
deactivation
Hazard warning lights flash twice.
The LED will come on for two seconds.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer.
Unlocking/
Hazard warning lights flash three times.
Car-battery
voltage
If the battery is disconnected while the alarm is
active (car is locked), for example during an
attempt to steal the car, the alarm will be trig-
gered.
deactivation of The LED will flash three times per second for 10
trunklid/tailgate seconds.
alarm
Alarm triggered Hazard warning lights flash for 5 min.
Horn wails for 30 seconds.
Alarm signals may differ between model variants for different coun-
tries.
Some of the car-alarm functions can be reprogrammed – con-
sult your Saab dealer for further details (see page 282).
To switch off the alarm, deactivate the system in
the normal way (unlocking).
Key
The range of the key is normally 5–10 yds. (5–
10 metres),althoughitcanbesubstantiallymore
than this in ideal conditions (range can vary
greatly depending on the position of the car and
its surroundings).
If the key is not working, it may be because the
code signal has not been synchronized with that
in the control module for the car alarm. To rectify
this, press the unlock button on the key at least
four times in quick succession. When it is recog-
nized, the door locks will cycle.
If a key is lost, the new one will have to be pro-
grammed(allkeysmustbepresent)tomatchthe
car’s unique security code. Contact an author-
ized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
Security
Overview of LED signals and SID messages
Status LED signal
Activation (during 10-second delay). Comes on for 10 seconds.
SID message
Reason/action
Theft protection failure.
Contact service.
Probably a fault in one of thesensors
or the horn.
Have the car checked by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
Alarm activated (after delay).
Flashes once every other
second.
Deactivation.
Comes on for 2 seconds.
Off.
Key not accepted.
Contact service.
Fault in key transmitter or in igni-
tion-switch receiver.
Turn ignition switch to ON and press
the unlock button on the key. Start
the engine.
Alarm not activated.
Door, trunk lid/tailgate or hood open Flashes three times per sec-
or opened during delay period.
ond for 10 seconds.
Have the car checked by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
Unlocking the trunk lid/tailgate.
Flashesthree timesper sec-
ond for 10 seconds.
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Fit a new battery in the key, see page
43.
Closing of door, trunk lid/tailgate or Comes on for 10 seconds.
hood after delay period.
• REMOTE KEY
• TRANSPONDR
Turn the ignition key to position ON
and then press the button for open-
ing the trunk lid. Saab Information
Display (SID) displays the number of
keysandtransmitters(transponders)
coded to the car.
Car immobilized but not locked.
Car alarm not activated.
Flashes twice at three sec-
onds intervals.
Fault in a switch serving doors, hood Flashing (instead of being
or trunk lid.
on continuously) during
delay period.
Some signals may differ between model variants for different
countries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
51
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired oper-
ation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manu-
facturer could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Security
(This page has been left blank)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
53
Instruments and
controls
PUSH
PULL
VOL
ON
BAL
1
4
2
5
3
6
Indicator and warning
lights _______________
54
…F
…C
ECON OFF
Instruments ___________
60
DOLBY
B
NR
BAS TRE
FAD
Saab Information Display
(SID) ________________
63
69
AS
SEARCH
Switches _____________
ON OFF
Automatic climate control
(ACC) _______________
75
CLEAR SET
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning
lights
A numberof indicatorandwarninglights will
come on when the ignition is switched on
prior to starting. Under normal conditions,
these should go out a few seconds after the
engine has started (see page 60).
Warning, oil pressure
(engine oil)
This light will come on together with
if
the engine oil pressure is dangerously low.
Ifthelightflashes orcomes on whileyouare
driving, stop the car, switch off the engine
and check the engine oil level (see page
204).
NOTICE
6 Fuel gauge
Main instrument panel
7 Engine temperature gauge
8 Trip meter reset button
9 Odometer and trip meter
1 Tachometer
Under no circumstances must the car be
driven when this warning light is on. Low
oil pressure can result in serious engine
damage.
2 Indicator and warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Indicator and warning lights
5 Pressure gauge
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
55
Parking brake warning
light
Warning, charging
Brake warning light
This light will show when the parking brake
is on (see page 196).
If the car is drivenwith the parking brake still
This light will come on together with
if
This light will come on together with
there is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-
voir (see pages 208).
If the ABS warning light is on at the same
time, the ABS system may be inoperative
because of a fault (see ”Anti-lock brake
warning”, page 56).
if
the battery is discharging. If it comes on
while you are driving, stop the car as soon
as possible and switch off the engine.
on,
sound.
will also come on and a chime will
Check the alternator drive belt (see page
212). If the belt has broken, the engine may
overheat (cooling system will not function
properly), the battery will not be charged,
the A/C compressor will not run and power
assistance for the steering will be lost.
The parking brake is mechanical and oper-
ates on the rear wheels.
WARNING
WARNING
Never drive the car when these warning
lights are on. Danger of brake failure!
• Always apply the parking brake when
parking, see page 196.
Have the brake system checked at once
by an authorized Saab dealer.
• Always apply the parking brake
before removing the ignition key.
• Do not apply the parking brake while
the car is moving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Instruments and controls
If the level is normal, depress the brake
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
thelevelagain. Ifthelevelisstillnormal, you
may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest authorized Saab dealer
to have the brake system checked.
WARNING
Anti-lock brake warning
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. One or more of the following
conditions may occur:
This light will come on if a fault has occurred
in the ABS system.
On certain variants
and
as well
WARNING
as can light up to indicate a fault in the
-Non-deploymentoftheairbagsinthe
event of a crash.
electronic brake force distribution system
(distribution of the brake pressure between
the front and rear wheels).
• If the ABS is inoperative, there is a
danger of the rear wheels locking up
on hard braking.
- Deployment of the airbags without a
crash.
Conventional braking without the ABS func-
tion will still be available.
For safety reasons, stop the car and check
the level of the brake fluid (see page 208).
• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-
voir is below the MIN mark, the car
should be towed to an authorized
Saab dealer.
- Deployment of the airbags in
crashes less severe than intended.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
Airbag warning light
The light will come on for about three sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to
the Start or Drive position. It should go out
after the engine has started.
This light together with
will come on if
a potentially serious fault has occurred in
the airbag system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
57
This light indicates a malfunction in the
fuel-injection or ignition system. The car
may still be driven with care and with some-
what diminished performance (see page
151).
Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)
CHECK message indicator
This light indicates that there is a message
in the Saab Information Display (SID). A
chime will also sound
WARNING
NOTICE
(see page 67).
An illuminated ”Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-
cates an engine-related problem. While
your car may be able to be driven with the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
indicator light illuminated (Limp-home
mode), you are advised to have your car
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
soon as possible.
The car should be checked immediately
at an authorized Saab dealer to prevent
more serious faults from arising.
Central warning light
This light will come on and a chime will
sound if a fault has been detected in any
system that is critical to safety. Any of the
following can activate the central warning
light and alarm:
Indicator, fuel
This light comes on when there is less than
about 2.5 gallons (10 liters) of fuel left in the
tank.
Continued driving without this problem
being corrected might cause serious
further damage to your car and create
unsafe driving conditions. The operator
should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g.brake
• Airbag system.
• Low oil pressure in engine.
• Parking brake is on (when car is moving).
• Brake fluid level low.
NOTICE
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-
ble place, switch off the engine, etc.).
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
• Fault detected in ABS system.
• Electronic brake force distribution (distri-
bution of brake pressure between front
and rear wheels).
• Engine overheating.
• Alternator not charging properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
Instruments and controls
Xenon headlight fault
indicator
(certain variants only)
Indicator, SPORT-mode
automatic transmission
Indicator, cruise control
This light shows when the cruise-control
system is active (see page 167).
This light indicates that there is a fault in the
Xenon headlight system, which consists of
xenonheadlightsandanautomaticlevelling
system.
This lightwillcomeonincarswithautomatic
transmission when the S (SPORT) button
on the selector lever has been pressed
(position N or D) see page 166.
If a fault arises in the Xenon headlight sys-
tem, the headlights will be angled down to
avoid dazzling drivers in oncoming traffic.
Adjust your speed accordingly as visibility
will be reduced.
In this mode, the gear changes occur later,
at higher engine revs, giving the engine and
transmission a sportier feel.
To cancel the SPORT mode, press the S
button on the selector lever again. The
mode is also deselected automatically
when the selector lever is moved to P, R, M
or L.
Indicator, high beam
This light shows when the headlights are on
high beam (see page 69).
NOTICE
IftheXenonheadlightfaultindicatorlights
up, have your car checked as soon as
Indicator, rear fog light
This light shows when the rear foglight is on
(see page 70).
The rear fog light is switched off automat-
ically whentheengineis switchedoff. When
the fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
Indicator, WINTER-mode
automatic transmission
Ifyoudonotrectifytheproblem,nighttime
visibility willbepoorsincetherangeof the
headlights is reduced.
This light shows when the WINTER mode
has been selected in cars with automatic
transmission (see page 166).
In the WINTER mode, the car pulls away in
3rd gear, to help prevent wheelspin on an
icy road.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
should not be mistaken for brake lights.
Indicator, open door
To cancel the WINTER mode, press the W
button.
If a door has not been closed properly, the
pictogram will indicate the door concerned
(or tailgate).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
59
Automatic transmission,
fault indicator
Indicator TCS/ESP OFF
Indicator TCS/ESP
On a car with an automatic transmission,
this warning symbol is illuminated if a fault
has been detected in the transmission.
Switch the ignition off and on again to check
if the fault persists.
Even if the fault persists, it is still possible in
most cases to drive the car (see page 161).
Have the automatic transmission checked
by an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.
The indicator light goes on when the Elec-
tronic Stability Program/Traction Control
System is switched off with the TCS/ESP-
button.
IMPORTANT: the system is automatically
engaged every time the engine is started
(see page 171).
The indicator light also goes on when there
is a fault in the system. In this case the light
cannot be turned off by means of the
TCS/ESPbutton. If a fault is indicated, have
the system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
See also ”Traction Control System (TCS)”,
on page 171 and “Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP) on page 172.
TheTCS/ESPindicatorlightislocatedinthe
tachometer and will be illuminated when
TCS/ESP regulation is occurring, i.e. when
there is insufficient traction between the
tiresand the roadsurfaceto providethe grip
required for the acceleration called for. The
driver can also sense that the engine is not
responding normally to the accelerator.
Operation of the TCS/ESP indicates
reduced traction between the tires and the
road, and that extra careshould be taken by
the driver.
In normal driving, the TCS/ESP will help to
improve both ride comfort and safety, but
must not be regarded as a system to enable
the driver to drive at or maintain a higher
rate of speed. The same precautions for
safecorneringanddrivingonslipperyroads
must still be applied (see page 171).
NOTICE
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 5th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish. To overcome this, select posi-
tionLtopreventunnecessarywearonthe
transmission. The transmission then
startsin2ndgear. Whenthecarismoving
you can select position D.
When the indicator light is on, the car
must not be driven with a trailer attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
Instruments and controls
1 Cars with automatic transmission
Odometer and trip meter
Instruments
Theodometerrecordsthedistancetraveled
in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian
vehicles the distance indicated is in kilome-
tres, and the trip meter in miles and tenths
(kilometres and tenths of kilometres on
Canadian vehicles).
Tachometer
Autochecking of lights,
main instrument panel
The tachometer indicates the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute. The
needle may be allowed to enter the broken
red zone on the dial only for an instant.
A safety cut-out function (in thefuelsystem)
prevents the engine speed from exceeding
approximately 6,000 rpm.
The above warning and indicator lights
should come on when the ignition is
switchedonpriortostarting. Theyshouldgo
out after about 3 seconds.
The following lights light up until the engine
is started, presuming that no fault exists:
Reset button
The reset button has two functions, deter-
mined by whether the ignition is ON or OFF.
• When the ignition is ON, pressing the
button will reset the trip meter.
• Central warning light
.
• When the ignition is OFF, the display
lights up for 20 seconds enabling you to
read the odometer and trip meter. Press-
ing the button a second time within these
20 seconds will reset the trip meter.
• Oil pressure warning light
.
• Warning, charging
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
61
60
100
50
80
70
40
60
120
80
30
140
40
90
20
10
160
100
110
120
130
20
180
200
220
240
260
140
150
160
Speedometer
(U.S. speedometer shown)
Fuel gauge
Temperature gauge
Fuel-tank capacity, 18.5 US gal. (70 liters).
The temperature gauge shows the temper-
ature of the coolant. The needle should be
in the middle of the scale when the engine
is at normal operating temperature.
Thefuelgaugeshowstheamountoffuelleft
in the tank. When this is down to about
2.5 gal. (10 liters), a warning light on the
main instrument panel will come on (see
page 57).
Use the Saab Information display (SID) to
check the approximate distance that can be
traveled on the remaining fuel
(see page 63).
The speedometer receives signals from the
wheel sensors in the ABS system.
If the NIGHT PANEL mode has been
selected, the scale will be illuminated up to
87 mph (140 km/h). The remainder of the
scale will be illuminated if the speed of the
car exceeds 84 mph (135 km/h).
If the needle approaches the red zone,
whichcanoccurinveryhotweatherorwhen
theengineisunderaheavyload,driveinthe
highest gear possible, keep the engine revs
low and avoid shifting down.
If the needle enters the red zone, the
warning light will come on and an alarm
chime will sound.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
Instruments and controls
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
and the engine at the same time loses
power, because the monitoring system is
holding the charging pressure down, you
should contact an authorized Saab dealer.
If the speed exceeds 149 mph/240 km/h
(155 mph/250 km/h, 9-5 Aero) the increase
inspeedwillbelimitedbytheloweringofthe
boost pressure. The pressure gauge then
moves towards the middle of the orange
zone, indicating reduced engine output and
thus reduces the speed of the car as well.
NOTICE
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car immedi-
ately, let the engine idle.
If the needle stays in the red zone, stop
the engine.
Check fuse 1 (radiator fan) in the fuse panel
under the hood, see page 231.
Iftheneedlerepeatedlyenterstheredzone,
stopthecar assoonas itis safetodosoand
check the coolant level by looking at the
level visible through the plastic tank – do not
remove the cap.
If the coolant level falls below theMIN mark,
the Saab Information Display (SID) will dis-
play the message ”Coolant level low.
Refill.”.
Pressure gauge
Theturbogaugeindicatestheair volumefor
combustion, which is equivalent to the
engine load.
At low loads, the needle will move within the
white zone. At higher loads and during
heavyacceleration, theneedlewillenter the
yellow area. At very high loads or under cer-
tain barometric conditions, the needle may
enter the first part of the red zone without
indicating that there is a fault.
WARNING
Neveropenthecapoftheexpansiontank
completely when the engine is hot, open
with care. The pressure in the cool-
ing-system can cause hot coolant and
steam to be released. Failure to heed this
warning may result in personal injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
63
Saab Information
Display (SID)
SET
NIGHT PANEL
CLEAR
WARNING
It is strongly recommended that the SID
settings be changed only when the car is
stationary. The driver’s attention can
otherwise easily be distracted from the
road.
Trip computer
Selecting the function
Use the
button to scroll through the
following functions:
The Saab Information Display (SID) shows
CHECK messages and incorporates eight
trip-computer functions.
Dist
Distance to destination / Trip
meter.
Selector lever indication
(Automatic transmission)
The SID is also used by the Audio System.
Arriv
Estimated time of arrival.
Alarm function.
The position of the selector lever is indi-
cated on the main instrument panel. If
manual mode is selected, the current gear
is also displayed.
Alarm
SpeedW Speed warning (chime).
Use the
button to scroll through the
following functions:
Date
Date, month and year
Temp.
D.T.E.
Outdoor temperature and Date.
Estimated range (distance to
empty fuel tank).
Fuel ∅
Average fuel consumption
since function last reset.
Speed ∅ Average speed since function
last reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
Instruments and controls
Outdoor temperature
Entering values for the functions
Values can be entered for the following
functions: Speed ∅, Dist, Arriv, Alarm and
Speed W.
Setting the date
(Frost warning)
1 Use
to select Date.
Regardless of which function has been
selected, except Night Panel Mode, SID will
automatically display the outdoor tempera-
ture when it is between 26° and 38°F (–3°
and +3°C). This also applies if the
temperature has moved outside the range
of 21° to 43°F (–6° to +6°C) but is again
between 26° and 38°F (–3° and +3°C).
2 Press the SET button for at least one
second (year starts to flash and a chime
sounds).
1 Select the desired function using
or
.
3 Set the year using
4 Touch SET.
5 Set the month in the same way.
6 Touch SET.
7 Set the day in the same way.
8 Press SET to save the date setting.
or
.
2 Press the SET button for at least one
second (figures start to flash and a
chime sounds).
3 Use
or
to increase or
decrease the value (press CLEAR to
reset).
WARNING
4 Press SET to record the value.
Remember that roads can be icy even at
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
especially on bridges and stretches of
road that are sheltered from the sun.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated
using the values for fuel consumed and dis-
tance driven since last reset. This value is
stored in the car’s trip computer even when
the engine is switched off.
• Select Fuel Ø with
.
To reset the value, press the CLEAR button
for 4 seconds. A chime will be heard and
CLEARED will be displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
65
Turning the Alarm and Speed
warning on or off
1 Select the Alarm or Speed-warning
function.
2 Press SET to turn on the function.
Press CLEAR to turn off the function.
Calculation of arrival time and
average speed
The settings must be made before the jour-
ney is started.
Using Dist as a trip meter
Ifnovaluehas beensetfortheDistfunction,
Dist will now function as a trip meter (indi-
cated by an arrow on the far right of the dis-
play).
Press CLEAR to reset the trip meter.
Calculation of arrival time:
Under 1000 miles the distance will be
shown in increments of 0.1 miles,
there-after, the reading will change in incre-
ments of 1.0 mile.
Metric units: for just under a kilometer, the
distance will be shown in increments of
10 meters, there-after, the reading will
change in increments of 100 meters.
When either function is on, Alarm/Speed W
respectivelywill be visible on thedisplay. An
asterisk * will be visible on the right of the
display when either function is selected.
The Alarm and Speed-warning settings will
not be cancelled when the engine is
switched off.
When the Alarm has been set to come on at
a specified time, it will only be activated
once – it will not come on at the same time
every day. Press SET to turn it on again.
The Alarm will continue to beep for one
minute if not switched off.
1 Select Dist using the
2 Set the destination distance.
3 Press SET.
button.
When Arriv. is selected during the journey,
thearrivaltimebasedonthe averagespeed
over the past 20 minutes will be displayed.
The trip computer will include any stops in
the calculation of the estimated time of
arrival.
PressDistandthedistanceremainingtothe
destination will be displayed in the same
way.
After the distance to destination has
decreased to zero, the Dist will function as
a trip meter (see ”Using Dist as a trip
meter”). The starting value for the trip meter
will be the last distance set in the Dist
function.
When Dist is functioning as a trip meter, the
Arriv function will display the current time.
Example: The Dist setting was 100 miles.
Once 100 miles (160 km) has been cov-
ered, the Dist will start to function as a trip
meter, the initial reading of which will be
100 miles (160 km).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
Instruments and controls
Tocalculate the arrivaltimeif aspecified
average speed is maintained
Calculating therequisiteaverage speed:
1 Press to select Dist.
2 Set the distance to be covered.
3 Press to select Arriv.
Resetting values
To reset the values, press CLEAR for at
least four seconds.
The following functions will be reset
simultaneously:
1 Select Dist using the
2 Set the distance to be covered.
3 Press to select Speed Ø.
button.
4 Set the desired arrival time.
• Estimated range on remaining fuel
(function based on a fuel consumption of
28 mpg).
• Average fuel consumption.
• Average speed.
• Arrival time (function based on current
speed).
Programmed values for Dist, Alarm and
Speed W will not be reset (see the respec-
tive function).
4 Set the average speed you intend to
drive.
5 Press SET to display the estimated
arrival time.
At the beginning of a journey, the Speed Ø
and Arriv functions will display current val-
ues. If values are set during the journey, the
new values will be displayed after a delay of
about 10 seconds.
5 Press SET to display the average speed
you need to maintain to arrive at the
desired time.
At the beginning of a journey, the Speed Ø
and Arriv functions will display current val-
ues. If values are set during the journey, the
new values will be displayed after a delay of
about 10 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
67
The following messages may be displayed:
CHECK messages
Night panel
Whentheengineis started, CHECKING will
appear on the display for about four sec-
onds, while the SID checks are being per-
formed.
When a CHECK message is generated
while the car is being driven, a chime will
sound, INFO DISPL will illuminate on the
main instrument panel, and the message
will appear on the SID. The number of mes-
sages that can be displayed by the SID
varies with the specification of the car.
If more than one CHECK message has
beengenerated, the +symbolwill appear to
the left of the text on the display. The mes-
sages appear in order of priority.
If a new fault occurs while another message
is being displayed, the message relating to
the new one will appear for 10 seconds,
after which the display will return to the ear-
lier one.
To improve night-driving conditions inside
the car, the Night Panel mode can be
selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-
mation displayed is reduced, and only the
most important instruments and displays
will be illuminated.
When the Night Panel button is pressed,
only thespeedometerwillbeilluminated(up
to the 87-mph or 140-km/h graduation), all
the other instruments illumination being
extinguished and their needles moved to
zero.BoththeSIDandtheACCdisplayswill
be extinguished and the backlighting for
switches and other controls will be dimmed.
Note: All indicator and warning lights,
together with the display of CHECK mes-
sages, will operate as normal, except ”Out-
door temperature (Frost warning)”, see
page 64.
Message
See
page
Fog light failure.
216
220
220
214
207
43
Rear light failure.
Brake light failure.
Washer fluid level low. Refill.
Coolant level low. Refill.
Remote control battery low.
Replace battery.
Key not accepted. Contact service.
50
50
Theft protection failure. Contact
service.
Gearbox too hot. Make a safe stop. 162
Tighten fuel filler cap.
154
264
Press CLEAR once to acknowledge a mes-
sage, whereupon it will be cleared from the
display. It will not be displayed again before
the ignition has been switched off and then
on again.
1)
Time for service.
1 Thismessagewillbedisplayedapproximately
600 miles (1,000 km) before the next sched-
uled service is due, or when 365 days have
elapsed since the last service. The message
should be cleared at the time of that service
(see the Saab Warranties & Service Record
Booklet).
This message can also be deleted by first
briefly pressing the CLEAR button, then
depressing it a second time for at least eight
seconds until ”SERVICE” appears on the dis-
play and a chime sounds. The message can
only be deleted when it is shown on the SID.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
Instruments and controls
The following conditions will wake up the
respective displays in the Night-Panel
mode:
Units and language versions
The SID has four sets of units:
METRIC IMP. 1
IMP. 2 US
• Setting of the Audio system, SID or ACC
(display comes on for ten seconds).
• CHECK message generated in the SID.
• High engine revs cause the rev counter to
be illuminated until the engine speed has
fallen again.
km
miles
mph
UK gal
°F
miles
mph
miles
mph
km/h
liters
°C
UK gal US gal
°C °F
• Ifthequantity of fuelremaining fallsbelow
4 gallons (15 liters), the fuel gauge will be
illuminated.
• If the engine temperaturerises above nor-
mal, the temperature gauge will be illumi-
nated.
• If the speed of the car exceeds 84 mph
(135 km/h), the entire speedometer will
be illuminated.
• In cars with automatic transmission, if the
selector lever is moved from D to position
M or L, the selector indication on the main
instrument panel will be illuminated.
24-hour 12-hour 12-hour 12-hour
CHECK messages can be displayed in six
language options: English, Swedish,
German, French, Italian and Spanish.
Clock
Set the clock by means of the two buttons
under the digital clock on the left of the dis-
play.
Selecting units and language
1 Press CLEAR and SET simultaneously
for four seconds until a chime sounds.
When the ignition key is in the OFF position
or removed, the clock can be illuminated
(approx. 10 seconds) by pressing one of
the SID buttons (not the NIGHT PANEL but-
ton).
2 Press
or
to select the
to select the
required units.
3 Touch SET.
4 Press
required language.
or
To restore the displays and lighting to the
normalmode, presstheNight-Panelbutton.
5 Touch SET.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
69
Switches
1
2
Daytime running lights
The parking lights and daytime running
lights come on automatically when the igni-
tion switch is ON.
Note to owners in the U.S.: If you do not
want Daytime Running Lights, this feature
can be disconnected: switch off the engine
and remove fuse No. 35 (see page 229).
Note to owners in Canada: Daytime Run-
ning Lights must not be disconnected as
they are a Canadian Federal legal require-
ment.
Light switches
1 High beam signal
2 High/low beam switching
Headlights
High beam flasher
The headlights come on to high beam when
the stalk is pulled to the first spring-loaded
position (position 1) and remain on until the
stalk is released.
Theheadlightscomeonautomaticallywhen
the ignition is ON and go off when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the LOCK position.
The parking lights, however, can be on
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-
tion.
Parking lights
The parking lights can be switched on
regardless of the position of the ignition
switch. Do not use parking lights when driv-
ing.
Note: The lighting switch must be in parking
light or headlight position (low beam posi-
tion only) to operate the fog lights (see page
72).
High/low beam
To switch between high and low beam, pull
the control stalk fully towards you
(position 2). When the high beam is on, the
indicator on the main instrument panel will
be illuminated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
Instruments and controls
Courtesy Headlight Feature
A delay function allows the headlights to
remain on low beam for about 30 seconds
after the driver’s door has been closed.
WARNING
In poor visibility, avoid following the tail
lights of the vehicle in front. If the vehicle
stops suddenly, you may be unable to
avoid a crash and therefore risk injury to
yourself and others.
To activate this function,
• Switch off the ignition and remove the key
• Open the driver’s door
• Pull the high/low beam control stalk
towards the steering wheel like you are
flashing thehigh beam, seepage 69. The
low beam headlights will now come on
immediately after the driver’s door has
been closed (within 30 seconds) and will
remain on for about 30 seconds.
Rear fog light
The length of time for this function can be
adjusted by your authorized Saab dealer.
Rear fog light
Press the button to switch on the rear fog
light, which will only come on if the head-
lights are on.
The rear fog light will go off automatically
when the engine is switched off. When the
fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
should not be mistaken for brake lights.
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-
cable provincial/state law regarding the
use of rear fog lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
71
Turn signal and lane change indica-
tors
To switch on the turn signals/lane change
indicators, move the stalk up or down.
1
The stalk has fixed positions for indicating a
right or left turn, and the indicators are can-
celled automatically (stalk returns to off
position).
The stalk also has an intermediate,
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
0
2
The respective indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel flash at the same frequency as
the direction indicators.
Instrument illumination
Turn signal and lane change indicators
1 Right indicators
2 Left indicators
Instrument illumination
The brightness of the instrument illumina-
tion can be varied by means of the dimmer
switch adjacent to the headlight switch.
(See also Night panel on page 67).
In daylight or other equally bright light, the
instrument and switch illumination is auto-
matically extinguished.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
Instruments and controls
WARNING
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of a crash, engine trouble or a puncture. If
youcarryawarningtriangleorflares, they
shouldbesetupalongthesideoftheroad
300 ft. (100 m) behind your vehicle. If the
car is not clearly visible (e.g. over the
brow of a hill or bridge), place the trian-
gle/flare even further back.
Reversing lights
Hazard warning lights
Front fog lights (certain models)
The front fog lights can be activated in both
low beam headlight and parking light posi-
tions. Fog lights should only be used in poor
visibility conditions.
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-
cable provincial/state law regarding the
use of fog lights.
The reversing lights come on automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or selected
with the ignition switched on.
Hazard warning lights
When this button is pressed, all the turn
signal indicators and a symbol in the button
flash simultaneously. If the ignition is on,
both indicator lights on the instrument panel
will also flash.
If the hazard warning lights are left on for
some time, the flasher frequency will be
reduced to save the battery.
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if the car constitutes a hazard to other road
users.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
73
Wipers and washers
1
0
There are three intermittent wiper positions.
1
Moving the control stalk to the
spring-loaded position between 0 and 2 will
produce a single sweep of the wipers.
The wipers are designed for optimal clean-
ing at all driving speeds. At higher speeds,
it may be possible to detect a slight ”sweep-
ing” sound. This may be due to the
increased air pressure on the blades at
higher speeds.
4
3
2
2
Headlight washers (certain models)
Iflowbeamison,theheadlightsarewashed
every fifth time the windshield washers are
used or if 2 minutes have elapsed since the
windshield was last washed. The headlight
washers cannot be activated separately.
Control for setting wiper delay
1 Long delay
2 Short delay
0 OFF
1 Intermittent operation
2 Low speed
3 High speed
4 Washers
The headlight washers are of the high-pres-
sure type, which means that other parts of
the car may become wet if you activate the
washers while the car is stationary.
Activate the system by lifting the control
stalk to position 1. The wipers make one
sweep for reference to see how much water
and snow is on the windshield. In future, the
sensor compares the amount of water and
snow on the windshield with this reference
value.
NOTICE
Rain sensing wipers (option)
To avoid damaging the windshield
wipers, turn the rain sensor off before
washing the car in an automatic carwash.
WARNING
When the engine has been switched off,
the control stalk must be moved to posi-
tion 0andbacktoposition1toreactivate
the sensor.
Set the sensitivity using the control on the
wiper stalk (the same control as used for
wiper delay on cars not fitted with a rain sen-
sor). The sensor has three sensitivity set-
tings. It is most sensitive when in the upper-
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
ON when clearing snow and ice from the
windshield, to avoid personal injury.
The rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
The system varies between single sweeps
of the windshield and continuous wiping
depending on how much water or snow
there is on the windshield.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
Instruments and controls
most position (1). When a higher degree of
sensitivity is selected, the wipers make one
sweep of the windshield for reference.
The rain sensor has a daylight and a night
time mode. The sensor measures the
amount of available light and automatically
selectstheappropriatemode. Thesensoris
more sensitive at night. The function of the
rain sensor is impaired by dry snow.
Rear-window wiper (9-5 Wagon)
The rear-window wiper and washer are
operatedwiththesamestalk switchasused
for washing and wiping the windshield and
headlights.
1
2
This stalk has two additional switches,
ON/OFF and
.
The ON position provides intermittent wip-
ing.
The
position provides washing and
wiping. After a few sweeps the wiper stops
or reverts to intermittent wiping, if this has
been chosen. About 15 seconds after com-
pletion of the washing/wiping of the rear
window, the wiper makes a single sweep to
wipe away any remaining washer fluid.
Rear-window wiper
1 Intermittent wiping
2 Washers
A spring-loaded position between the OFF
and ON positions allows for a single sweep
of the rear-window wiper.
Intermittent wiping of the rear window
occurs when reverse gear is engaged if the
windshield wipers are in position 1, 2 or 3,
see page 73.
For how to adjust the rear window washer
jet on the 9-5 Wagon, refer to page 213.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
75
Automatic climate
control (ACC)
ºF
ºC
ºF
ºC
The ACC system automatically works to
maintain the desired temperature inside the
car.
AUTO
ECON OFF
4
The system will achieve the desired temper-
ature inthe quickest possible way. Note that
selectingahigherorlowertemperaturethan
that desired will not speed up the process.
For the ACC system to be most effective, all
windows (and sunroof, if fitted) should be
closed.
2
5
6
AUTO
1
9
3
ECON OFF
7
8
Freshairforthecabinisdrawninthroughan
inletgrilleadjacenttothebottom edgeofthe
windshield. The air flows through a filter
upstream of the ACC system before deliv-
ery to the cabin. Cabin air is evacuated via
openings in the rear parcel shelf and then
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
ACC panel
6 Recirculation: ON/OFF
7 A/C compressor: ON/OFF
8 ACC system: ON/OFF
1 Temperature setting: LH side
2 AUTO: All settings selected automatically
3 Manual setting of fan speed
9 Temperature setting: RH side
4 Manual setting of air distribution
5 Rear-window heating: ON/OFF
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled and, finally, if required,
heated.
The filter is a combined particle and char-
coal filter. It is so efficient that levels of nox-
ious substances such as benzene and tolu-
ene are also reduced.
To reduce the likelihood of misting on the
insides of the windows, the glass should be
cleaned with a quality window cleaner. How
often this will need to be done depends on
how clean the air is – if there are smokers in
the car, cleaning will need to be done more
frequently.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
Instruments and controls
The system has five sensors:
1
• Outdoor temperature sensor
• Interior temperature sensor
• Sun sensor (mounted on top of the fascia)
• Two blended-air temperature sensors
(mounted inside the front floor vents)
Note If anything is placed over the sun sen-
sor, the ACC system will not function prop-
erly.
Panel vent
Panel vents
The panel vents swivel universally, so that
air can be directed as desired. In winter, for
instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The flow of air through the panel vents can
be controlled individually for each vent by
means of the adjacent control. The climate
control system works best if the panel vents
are open. If you find the air cold or that it is
drafty, start by directing the air away from
thebody. Ifthecenterventisaimedup, itwill
cool the interior temperature sensor and
you may need to adjust ACC up or down,
depending upon temperature desired.
2
1 Interior-temperature sensor
2 Sun sensor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
77
Settings when HI selected:
Temperature control
The cabin is divided into two temperature
zones:
• Maximum heat
• Air distribution to windshield and floor
• Recirculation OFF (even if manually
selected before)
• Fan: high speed
• The driver’s zone
• The passenger zone (front and rear
seats)
The desired temperature can be set
• Settings shown on ACC display
Settings when LO selected:
between 58 and 82°F (15 and 27°C). In
addition, there are also HI and LO settings
(see below). The HI and LO settings for the
passenger zone can only be selected if they
are also selected for the driver’s zone.
• Maximum cooling (A/C compressor will
run even if ECON manually selected
before)
The displayed temperature is not the abso-
lute temperature but corresponds to the
comfort level normally experienced at that
temperature after allowance has been
madefortheair flow, relativehumidity, solar
radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside
the car.
• Air distribution through panel vents
• Fan: maximum speed
• Recirculation ON
Air vent at rear side window
• Settings shown on ACC display
• The most usual temperature setting is
64–76°F (18–24°C), depending on per-
sonal preference and what clothing is
worn.
• It is recommended that changes in the
temperature setting be made in steps of
2°F (1°C).
• Once the desired climate has been
achieved, the rear center vents can be
closed to prevent warm air being distrib-
uted at face height.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
Instruments and controls
Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
Ifamanualfunctionis selected, itwillbelockedinbutotherfunctions
will be controlled automatically.
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
A/C compressor OFF.
No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution
and fan speed still under automatic control.
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and
recirculation will all be controlled automatically.
In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched off at 32°F (0°C).
In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched on at 41°F (+5°C).
ACC system OFF.
Fan OFF.
A/C compressor OFF.
Warm air OFF.
If at the start the outside air temperature is 32–41°F
(0 – +5°C), the A/C compressor is switched off.
Air-distributionselectionslockedincurrentsettings.
Recirculation can be selected manually.
Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into
automatic mode.
Pressing the OFF button again will result in the sys-
tem reverting to any previous manual settings.
• Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous
manual selections.
• Pressing AUTO a second time will result in all the
automatically selected settings being displayed.
When the engine is started, the A/C system is in
AUTO mode, apart from any currently set program,
see page 81 and 82).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
79
The rear-window and door-mirror heating is
controlled manually.
To increase the fan speed in steps.
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed
until the engine is running.
Switch off the heating as soon as the rear window
is clear, to avoid imposing a heavy load on the bat-
tery longer than necessary. Note, however, that the
heating will go off automatically after 2–10 minutes
(depending on the outdoor temperature) or sooner
if the voltage in the electrical system falls below
10 V.
The ACC system can be programmed to switch on
the heating automatically when the outdoor temper-
ature is below 41°F (+5°C) and the temperature
inside the car is below 50°F (+10°C) (see ”Program-
ming I and II”, on pages 81 and 82).
To decrease the fan speed in steps.
If the fan is set to 0, the A/C compressor will cut out
and ECON will appear on the display.
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed
until the engine is running.
Recirculation is selected automatically for effective
cooling, but it can also be switched on/off manually.
Although recirculation does not substantially affect
the air quality, it is useful to prevent unpleasant
smells or fumes being drawn into the car from
outside.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
Instruments and controls
Air distribution
Press once: Defrosting of all windows will take
place (air flow to rear side windows shut off) with:
Defroster & floor vents
• The fan running at high speed.
• Air being distributed to the defroster vents.
• Normal temperature control will operate.
• Recirculation will be OFF.
• Heating of the rear window and door mirrors will
be switched ON.
The defroster function will continue to operate until
a new selection is made, although the heating for
the rear window and door mirrors will be switched
off automatically after 2–10 minutes, depending on
the temperature outside.
Floor vents and rear side windows
Presstwice:Airwillbedirectedontothewindshield
with no increase in the fan speed. The heating for
the rear window will not be switched on.
To revert to the previous selection, press the AUTO
button.
Floor & panel vents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
81
Programming I
Manual selections can be programmed into the ACC system so that
these will take effect when the car is started. Note that the ignition
must be switched off for at least ten minutes after programming for
the selections to be saved in the system’s memory.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Select the desired settings.
3 Press
and
, simultaneously
Panel (and center rear vent)
Starting in cold weather
(the display will flash to confirm that the settings have been
recorded).
To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster set-
ting, maximum heat and low fan speed.
Example: If you want air distribution through the panel vents when
As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor
vents and the fan speed will be increased.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the
fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by
the system.
you start the car, press
and then save the setting by pressing
and
.
Cancelling the programmed settings (I)
To cancel the programmed settings, press
and
simultaneously (the display will flash to confirm that the settings
have been cancelled).
Starting in hot weather
The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents
at high fan speed and will switch on the A/C compressor (unless the
ECON switch has been pressed).
If the outdoor temperature is above 86°F (30°C), the system might
selectrecirculationafterapproximately15 secondsifthis is required
in order to reach the desired temperature.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan
speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
Instruments and controls
Programming II
It is also possible to customize the ACC system, e.g. to adapt to
driving and weather conditions.
Recirculation will be
Recirculation is
switched on if the speed of
switched on about
thecarislessthan6 mph(10 45 seconds after start-
km/h)andwill be switched off ing if the outdoor tem-
when the speed has risen
above20 mph (30 km/h), but (+30°C) and the
not if the ECON mode has selected temperature
beenprogrammedaccording for the cabin is well
to ”Programming II”. below the actual tem-
To prevent misting, this func- perature in both tem-
tion is disengaged at outdoor perature zones.
temperatures lower than
45°F (+7°C) and engaged at
temperatures above 50°F
Function Operation in AUTO mode Standard operation
peratureis above86°F
after Programming II
in AUTO mode
The A/C compressor will not A/C compressor cuts
activate unless the outdoor in when outdoor tem-
temperature is above 55°F
(+13°C).
–This function saves fuel by
delaying the activation of the
A/C compressor. However,
in wet weather it is advisable
to have the A/C compressor
running when outdoor tem-
peratures are below 57°F
(+14°C), as the A/C system
reduces the likelihood of the
windows fogging up.
peratureisabove41°F
(+5°C)
(+10°C).
–This function is useful to
prevent fumes being drawn
into the car in traffic jams.
The heating will come on
Rear-window heating
about five seconds after the can only be switched
engine has started if the out- on manually.
door temperature is below
41°F (+5°C).
–This function helps to pre-
vent ice or mist forming on
the rear window in cold,
damp weather. Fuel con-
sumption may increase
slightly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
83
To program a function or to cancel a programmed function, press
and hold in the relevant button until the corresponding symbol has
flashed four times on the display and a chime has sounded.
Calibration
If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the system will
need to be recalibrated.
Make sure the ignition is ON.
To start the calibration procedure:
1 Start the engine.
Function Text displayed on SID Text displayed on SID
during programming
when cancelling
program
2 Press
and
simultaneously.
Calibration takes about 30 seconds. During this time and for about
3 seconds after the operation has been completed, the number of
fault codes (if any) stored in the system will appear in the tempera-
ture display on the left. The fault codes themselves will be shown in
the temperature display on the right.
ACC: LO TEMP
A/C CTRL
ACC: NORMAL
A/C CTRL
ACC: RECIRC
ACC: SPEED CTRL
ACC: RECIRC
ACC: NORMAL CTRL
Useful tips
(Before driving the car to an authorized Saab dealer)
ACC: AUTO
RDEFR CTRL
ACC: MANUAL
RDEFR CTRL
• If AUTO is not shown on the display, see ”Cancelling the pro-
grammed settings (I)” on page 81.
• If you suspect that the ACC system is not functioning properly,
system.
Example: To have the ACC system switch the heating for the rear
window and door mirrors ON/OFF automatically, press and hold in
See ”Cancelling the programmed settings (I) and (II)”, pages 81
and 82, and ”Calibration” above.
Note that AUTO will show on the display even if you have com-
pleted Programming II, but that this does not apply to Program-
ming I.
• If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the ACC system
will need to be recalibrated. See ”Calibration” above.
• If the system starts in OFF mode, cancel the programme. Refer to
Cancelling the programmed settings (I) on page 81.
until the symbol has flashed four times on the display and a
chime has sounded.
The display shows:
ACC: AUTO
RDEFR CTRL
Once a function has been recorded under ”Programming II”, it will
remain in the system until you cancel the program.
AUTO will still show on the display after a function has been saved
in ”Programming II”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
Instruments and controls
Condensation
Formation of ice and mist in
Fault diagnosis and maintenance,
see page 252.
extremes of weather
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets
underneaththefloorofthecar, inthevicinity
of the front doors.
It is only in the most extreme conditions that
icing and misting of window glass are likely
to be a problem, e.g. in torrential rain or
severe cold coupled with high relative
humidity, or when passengers are perspir-
ing heavily or wearing wet clothes.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from these outlets when
the car is parked. Greater amounts of con-
densation will result in warmer, more humid
ambient air.
The following measures are recommended
if such problems should occur:
1 Select AUTO and 70°F (21°C) for both
temperature zones.
2 Select Defroster.
If this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed.
If this is not enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
The following measures are recommended
if the occupants feel that it is cold and drafty
in the car:
1 Make sure that all the air vents are fully
open, including the center rear vent.
If this is not enough...
2 Direct the air flow away from the body
(butnottowardstheinteriortemperature
sensor).
If this is not enough...
3 Raise the temperature setting a degree
or two. If this is not enough...
4 Lower the fan speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
85
Saab 9-5 Audio
System
Quick guide to the Saab
9-5 Audio System ____
87
Sound controls _______
Radio _______________
Cassette player _______
CD player ____________
CD changer __________
89
90
92
95
97
Programmable functions 101
Steering-wheel controls
Security lock _________
Technical data________
Fault codes __________
102
103
104
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
Saab 9-5 Audio System
To get the best out of your Saab 9-5 Audio
System, we recommend that you read
through this entire section.
The Saab 9-5 Audio System is available in
two versions: Premium on the 9-5 Linear
and Prestige on the 9-5 Arc and 9-5 Aero
Both models have been specially matched
to the Saab 9-5 cabin.
The Audio System is connected to the Saab
Information Display (SID), which is at the
top of the main instrument panel. Mes-
sages, indicators and the like for the Audio
System are shown on this display.
Indicator
AS
Radio is in Autostore mode
RDM
Random playback of CD
tracks when CD player
selected
DOLBY B noise reduction
on for cassette player
(DOLBY B)
The two systems are comprised of a radio,
CD player and cassette player.
A six-disc CD changer for installation in the
luggage compartment is available as a
dealer-installed accessory/option.
The Premium system has seven speakers:
three mounted in the fascia (the center
speaker further enhances the overall sound
image) and one in each door.
The Prestige system (Harman Kardon) has
nine speakers (9-5 Sport Wagon has eight
speakers): three mounted in the fascia (the
center speaker further enhances the sound
image), one in each door and two subwoof-
ers in the rear window shelf (9-5 Sport
Wagon: one subwoofer in the luggage com-
partment). The subwoofers enhance repro-
duction of the lowest bass notes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
87
Quick guide to the
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio (see page 90)
Preset station buttons
1
4
2
5
3
6
Press once: play the preset station.
Press & hold briefly: store a new station.
Auto tuning
ON
PUSH
PULL
VOL
Press once: auto (seek) tuning.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):
manual tuning.
To switch the system ON, press the volume but-
ton. The last settings used will be activated.
If the Audio System is switched on when the igni-
tion key is not in the switch, the system will auto-
matically be switched off after one hour has
elapsed since a control button on the radio was
last pressed.
ON
BAL
SEEK
Press once: Autostore ON/OFF.
Press & hold briefly: automatic tuning and
storing of the 6 strongest stations.
AS
SEARCH
OFF
ton or remove the ignition key.
VOL
Press once: change waveband.
To adjust the volume, rotate the VOL control.
BAL
To adjust the balance between the left and right
channels, pull out and turn the VOL control.
Press once: activate radio.
BAS
BAS TRE
FAD
Press to release the button, and adjust the bass
level. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
TRE
Press to release the button, and adjust the tre-
ble. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
FAD
Press to release the button, and adjust the fade
between the front and rear sets of speakers.
Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player. See page 92
Remove CD.
Pressonce:Selectscassetteplayerwhenother
source active.
When tape playing: Dolby B ON/OFF.
CD changer (accessory/option). See page 97
Switch to playback other side of tape.
Press once: Change to CD changer when CD
player is active.
CD
RDM
Presstwice:ChangetoCDchangerwhenradio
or cassette player is active.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):
Random playback of entire magazine.
Eject.
Press once: Track search on current disc.
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once: Switch
between Rapid play (PLAY) and Fast track
search (TRACK).
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly (a
chime will sound): Scan/disc.
SEEK
Press once: Music search (next track).
Press & hold briefly: Fast forward/rewind.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) (a chime will
sound): Blank skip ON/OFF.
SEEK
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold
(2 chimes): Scan/magazine.
CD player. See page 95
Press once: switch to CD player when other
Selects disc in magazine.
CD
source active.
1
4
2
5
3
6
RDM
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):
Random playback.
Press once: Track search.
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play (passage
search) or Fast track search.
SEEK
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once (a chime
will sound): Switches between Rapid play
(PLAY) and Fast track search (TRACK).
PressSEEK(mid-segment) &hold briefly(a
chime will sound): Scan disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
89
Sound controls
ON/OFF
The Audio System will come on:
• When the volume control is pressed.
• When the ignition is switched ON, if the
Audio System was on when the ignition
key was last removed.
The Audio System will be switched off:
• When the volume control is pressed.
• When the ignition key is removed.
• One hour after the ignition was switched
OFF, if the ignition key has not been
removed.
• When one hour has elapsed since a con-
trol button on the Audio System was last
pressed after the ignition key was
removed.
BAS – Bass
TRE – Treble
Rotate clockwise to increase the level and
counter-clockwise to reduce it.
The Bass and Treble controls must be
pressed first to release them.
FAD – Fader
VOL – Volume
BAL – Balance
Pull out and rotate the VOL control to adjust
the balance between the left and right
speakers. When the control is released, it
reverts to the volume function.
The fader control adjusts the balance
betweenthefrontandrearsetsofspeakers.
The Fader controls must be pressed first to
release it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio
Press the RADIO/BAND button to switch to
the radio when another source is active.
Preset station buttons (1)
Press once (release within a second) to
select a preset station, e.g.
The small figure on the far right of the dis-
play is the number of the preset button
selected.
Presetting a station
Press and hold in the desired button (for
more than a second) to store the currently
tuned station. During this time, the radio will
be mute. The sound will return as soon as
the station has been stored.
Tuning (2)
Automatic seek tuning:
Press
briefly to search for higher fre-
quencies or
Manual tuning:
for lower frequencies.
To switch to the manual-tuning function,
press or and release quickly
(a chime will sound and the M indicator will
appear on the display).
The function will revert to automatic seek
tuningtwo secondsafter the lastmanual fre-
quency change has been made.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
91
Waveband selector (3)
AS, Autostore (4)
Press the RADIO/BAND button repeatedly
to move through the waveband selections:
FM1, FM2, and AM.
The autostore mode provides an additional
preset function that can be used to search
for and to store stations when you are in an
area where you are unfamiliar with the sta-
tions and their frequencies.
Press the AS/SEARCH button to switch the
Autostore mode ON/OFF. When the
Autostore mode is ON, the AS indicator will
show at the bottom of the display.
Press and hold in the AS/SEARCH button
for more than a second to initiate a search
for the six strongest stations.
Each time the system finds and stores a sta-
tion, the number on the far right of the dis-
play will change. If the system cannot find
six stations with good reception, the remain-
ing preset buttons will be empty. If one of
these empty buttons is pressed, U**** (FM)
or AM**** will appear on the display.
When the system leaves the AS mode, it
returns to the station that was selected
before the AS mode was activated.
The AS mode can also be used in the AM
band.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player
Before playing a tape, make sure that the
label is secure and that the cassette is not
warped, otherwise the cassette can
become jammed in the deck. The cassette
player automatically senses whether the
tape is normal or metal (Type I or Type II).
5
TAPE (1)
Turn on the cassette player by pressing
2
4
or by inserting a cassette in the
deck, with the exposed tape to the right.
Playbackwillstartwiththesidethatisfacing
up (indicated by A on the display). The dis-
play will now be as follows:
1
3
Dolby® noise reduction (3)
Press TAPE/DOLBY to switch on
Dolby NR B.
Dolby B should be on for playback of tapes
recorded with Dolby B, and off for those
recorded without Dolby B.
Eject button (4)
To stop playback of a tape, press the eject
Playback direction (2)
button or select another source.
To play the other side of the tape,
If you select another source without press-
ing the eject button, the tape will remain in
the deck but the head and pinch rollers will
be clear of the tape. The same applies if the
Audio System is switched off while a tape is
being played. Tapes can still be ejected
when the system is turned off.
press
.
The deckwill automatically changetheplay-
back direction when the end of the tape is
reached, be it during playback, fast
forward/rewind or music search.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
93
Music search forward/reverse (5)
Fast forward/rewind
Auto music search (Blank skip)
To switch the Blank-skip function ON/OFF,
To search forward for a track, press
and release quickly (within half a second).
The following will now appear on the dis-
play:
Press and hold
to start fast-
forward to the end of the tape. The following
will now appear on the display:
press and hold
(mid-segment).
When the Blank-skip function is active (dis-
play: BL SKIP ON), unrecorded gaps that
are longer than 15 seconds will automati-
cally be skipped.
When auto music search is in progress, the
following will show on the display:
Press
once to cancel fast-forward.
(mid-segment)
To perform a backward search, press
instead.
A forward search will continue until a gap of
at least 4 seconds is found, or until you
Press and hold
briefly to switch to music search.
Fast rewind (<< WIND) is performed in the
same way as fast forward.
If a track has been recorded at an unusually
low level and is therefore identified incor-
rectly as a gap between tracks, it could ini-
tiate a spurious ”auto music search”.
press
or
(mid-segment).
Pressing and holding the button during a
search will initiate the fast-forward function.
To cancel such a search, press and hold
(mid-segment) during playback.
The following will now appear on the dis-
play:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Type II (metal) tapes
The cassette has an automatic tape-type
selector.
Tape care
Do not expose cassette tapes to direct sun-
light or to extremes of temperature as this
can damage the cassette and the tape.
Cleaning-due indicator
After 30 hours’ playing time, the following
message will appear on the display:
Always keep cassettes in their boxes when
not in use.
If a cassette should become jammed in the
deck, contact an authorized Saab dealer.
The message will be displayed for ten
seconds each time the cassette player is
selected.
A cleaning tape should be used to clean the
headsinsidethecassetteplayer tomaintain
good reproduction and to prevent unneces-
sary wear.
To reset the playing-time meter:
1 Remove the current tape.
2 Load the cleaning tape andplay it for the
required time.
3 Remove the cleaning tape and reload
the other one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
95
CD player
3
NOTICE
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio
System. In certain cases, this type of CD
is only suitable for home use and can
therefore cause operational problems
(overheating).
1
To select the CD mode, load a CD into the
deck or, if one is already loaded, press the
CD/RDM button.
Insert the CD, label-side up, and allow the
mechanism to load it automatically. Play-
backofthefirsttrackwillstartandthefollow-
ing message will appear on the display:
2
Track search (1)
Press or
Rapid play (passage search)
repeatedly to move
When
or
is pressed and
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing
held,rapidplaywillbeinitiated,withthetime
and track showing on the display, e.g.:
once will restart playback from the
A tiny, amber-colored LED indicator to the
left of the disctray is illuminatedwhenadisc
is loaded.
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play
the preceding track, press
twice.
When all the tracks have been played, the
CD player will restart playback from track 1.
To cancel playback, press the eject, RADIO
or TAPE button.
If the button is depressed for more than
5 seconds,therapidplaywillbeevenfaster.
Rapid play stops when the button is
released.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Fast track search
Random playback (RDM) (2)
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
select/deselect random playback of the cur-
rent disc. When this function is selected,
RDM will appear at the bottom of the dis-
play.
Press
(mid-segment) once to
switch between the CD-PLAY and
CD-TRACK modes.
Eject (3)
Press
to remove the disc.
Press
oncetomovefromthecurrent
track to the next during random playback.
If you press the eject button to open the tray
but do not remove the disc, the CD player
will automatically close the tray again after
10 seconds, without restarting playback.
Press once to repeat the current
track during random playback.
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes
change the function of
and
.
Pressing and holding
start Rapid play.
or
will
The selected mode will also be active the
next time the system is switched on.
Choose the mode that you find most conve-
nient:
SCAN
To start the SCAN function, which enables
you to hear a sample of each track on the
CD PLAY
Pressing and holding
disc, press and hold
(mid-seg-
or
briefly
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in
progress and which track is currently being
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN
while playing the first track, the following
display will appear:
starts Rapid play
CD TRACK Pressing and holding
or
briefly
starts Fast track search
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-
onds.
When all the tracks on the disc have been
scanned, the system will revert to playback
of the track that was playing when SCAN
was selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
97
2
3
1
4
CD changer in luggage compartment,
Saab 9-5 Sedan
CD changer in luggage compartment,
Saab 9-5 Wagon
Changing a CD
To select the CD changer
To load the CD changer (which is installed
in the luggage compartment and can
• If the Audio System is in the RADIO or
TAPE mode, press the CD/RDM button
twice.
CD changer
accommodate six CDs) proceed as follows:
(accessory)
1 Slide the top back.
2 Lift out the CD magazine.
3 Press back the catch on the magazine.
4 Withdraw one CD tray at a time and
swap/load the CD (label side up).
• If the CD player is active, press the
CD/RDM button once.
If the CDs in the magazine have not been
changed, the system will start playback
from where it left off before.
NOTICE
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio
System. In certain cases, this type of CD
is only suitable for home use and can
therefore cause operational problems
(overheating).
If there is no magazine in the CD changer,
the following will appear on the display:
5 Slide the tray back into the magazine.
Note the position of the magazine for load-
ing (see picture).
Insert the entire magazine carefully inside
the CD changer and slide back the cover.
Important! Always keep the sliding cover
closed to keep dust out of the CD changer,
so that it willcontinueto provide satisfactory
service for a long time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
Saab 9-5 Audio System
If the magazine in the CD changer is empty,
the following will appear on the display:
1
2
If the CD changer is activated right after a
magazine has been loaded, the following
will appear on the display:
The CD number will change as each CD is
played.
After a magazine has been loaded, play-
back will start with the first track on the first
CD when the CD changer is selected, and
the following will appear on the display:
3
If the selected CD-tray is empty, the follow-
ing will appear on the display:
Selecting CDs (1)
When the CD changer is operating, the
radio preset buttons work for the six CDs in
the magazine. Press the button for the
corresponding CD.
If the selected CD is already being played,
playback will restart from the first track.
After two seconds, the status of the trays in
the magazine (i.e. loaded or empty) will be
shown on the display, e.g.:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System
99
If for some reason the CD selected by the
preset button cannot be played, playback of
the current CD will continue.
Track search (2)
1
Press
or
repeatedly to move
2
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing
once will restart playback from the
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play
the preceding track, press
twice.
Rapid play
When
or
is pressed and
held,rapidplaywillbeinitiated,withthetime
and track showing on the display, e.g.:
3
Choose the mode that you find most
convenient:
Fast track search
If the button is depressed for more than
5 seconds,therapidplaywillbeevenfaster.
Rapid play stops when the button is
released.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once to switch
between the CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK
modes.
CD PLAY
Pressing and holding
or
briefly
starts Rapid play
CD TRACK Pressing and holding
or
briefly
starts Fast track search
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes
change the function of
and
.
The selected mode will also be active the
next time the system is switched on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Scanning the entire magazine:
SCAN
Random playback (RDM) (3)
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
select/deselect random playback of the
CDs in the magazine. When this function is
selected, RDM will appear at the bottom of
the display.
Scanning the current CD:
Press and hold
(mid-segment -
To start the SCAN function, which enables
you to hear a sample of each track on the
disc, press and hold
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in
progress and which track is currently being
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN
while playing track one, the following dis-
play will appear:
two chimes) to start a scan of the entire
magazine. A message similar to the follow-
ing will appear on the display:
(mid-seg-
Press
once to move from the current
track to the next during random playback.
Press once to repeat the current
track during random playback.
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the beginning of the first track on each
CD and lasts for 8 seconds.
Pressing and holding
start Rapid play.
or
will
To stop playback from the CD changer,
simply select once to move from the current
track to the next during random playback
(RADIO/TAPE/ CD). The CD changer will
now enter stand-by mode.
After the first track of each CD has been
sampled, the CD changer will revert to play-
back of the track that was playing when
SCAN was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-
onds.
When all the tracks on the disc have been
scanned, the system will revert to playback
of the track that was playing when SCAN
was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System 101
Adjusting the volume
Speed-dependent volume
(SP D VOL) ON/OFF
Programmable
functions
The default setting for START VOL is
volume setting 9, and that for TEL VOL is
volume setting 14 (the highest volume set-
ting is 30).
WARNING
• Maximum START VOL
These functions should only be carried
out when the car is stationary.
To change the default setting:
The default setting for this function is ON.
– Press and hold the WB button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
Volume-preset mode
To select the volume-preset mode, press
and hold the WB button at the same time as
you switch the Audio System on.
– Select SP D VOL using
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control.
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
default setting.
• TELVOL
Use the
desired function.
button to select the
The following volume settings can be
preselected:
• START VOL – maximum volume level
when the Audio System is switched on
To change the volume setting:
• TELVOL – preset volume level when an
in-car phone is activated
• SP D VOL – speed-dependent volume.
The Audio System will automatically
adjust the volume level to compensate for
background noise, such as road noise,
which increases with vehicle speed.
• LOUDNESS ON/OFF – boosting of the
highest and lowest frequency ranges to
enhance the sound image when the
volume is set to a low level.
– Press and hold the WB button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
– Adjust the volume
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
volume setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Loudness ON/OFF
Steering-wheel controls
To facilitate use of the Audio System and to
promote safer driving, most of the functions
can be operated using the integral remote
controls on the steering wheel.
To change the default setting:
The default setting for this function is ON.
Control functions:
NXT:
RADIO mode: preselect buttons
1⇒2⇒...⇒ 6⇒1⇒...
TAPE mode: Play other side of tape.
– Press and hold the WB button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
– Select LOUDNESS using
CD mode: Inoperative.
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control.
CD-changer mode: Select CD in magazine
1⇒2⇒...⇒ 6⇒1⇒...
Audio System controls on steering wheel
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
default setting.
<< SEEK >>:
RADIO mode: Auto/manual tuning.
TAPE mode:
Music search/Fast forward or rewind.
CD/CD-changer mode:
Track search/Rapid play.
SRC (source)
Press repeatedly to switch between
RADIO ⇒ TAPE ⇒ CD ⇒ (CD changer)
⇒RADIO ⇒...
VOL +/–:
Volume adjust.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System 103
If the security codefor the CD changer does
notmatchwhenthechangerisselected, the
following will appear on the display:
Security lock
The Audio System is equipped with an elec-
tronic security lock. The special code is
unique to the car in which the Audio System
is fitted.
Each time the Audio System is switched on,
a check is made to ensure that the codes
match.
If not, the following will appear on the dis-
play:
If a CD changer is to be retrofitted or if you
wish to move the main Audio System
module and/or CD changer to another car
(Saab 9-5), you must consult an authorized
Saab dealer so that the modules can be
given the correct security codes.
If a CD changer has been installed, it will
also have been security coded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Frequency range (FM) ________ 40–15000 Hz
±1 dB
Distortion (FM) ______________ < 0.5 %
Technical data
Tone controls
Bass ______________________ ±10 dB at 100 Hz
Treble _____________________ ±10 dB at 10,000 Hz
Cassette player
Fast forward/rewind __________ < 120 seconds (C-60)
Frequency range _____________ 40–16000 Hz
±2 dB
Wow and flutter ______________ 0.2 % WRMS
Signal-to-noise ratio __________ 45 dB
Dolby B NR effect ____________ 8/16 dB
Power output
Premium __________________ 150 W
110 W at 1 % THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
Prestige __________________ 200 W
150 W at 1 % THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
CD player and CD changer
Radio module
1-bit system and 8 x oversampling
Radio system _______________ PLL dual-synthesizer tuner
Number of presets:
Frequency range _____________ 20–20000 Hz
±0.5 dB
Distortion __________________ < 0.008 %
Dynamics __________________ > 80 dB (1 kHz)
CD-changer capacity__________ 6 discs
FM ______________________ 3 x 6
AM ______________________ 2 x 6
Frequency range:
FM ______________________ 87.9–107.9 MHz
AM ______________________ 530–1710 kHz
Tuning steps:
Automatic seek tuning: _______ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
• These specifications comply with the new IHF Standard
• Since the policy at Saab is one of continual improvement, we retain the right to alter
specifications and design without prior notice.
• Dolby noise reduction is produced under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation
• ”Dolby” and the double-D symbol
ing Corporation
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licens-
Manual tuning: _____________ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance
could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saab 9-5 Audio System 105
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash
Antennas
Multipath propagation
The Audio System has three antennas
incorporated in the rear window; two for FM
diversity and one for AM.
Multipath propagation occurs when radio
waves from an FM transmitter are reflected
by, e.g. large buildings, causing them to
arrive slightly later than the direct waves.
This can create interference to radio recep-
tion. To avoid this problem as much as pos-
sible the system is equipped with two FM
antennas, so called FM diversity.
NOTICE
Refrain from placing hard or sharp
objects on the rear parcel shelf, to avoid
damaging the antenna leads.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head injuries in the
event of a crash, the headliner and pillar
trims incorporate energy absorbing mate-
rial. These areas must not be modified in
any way. Work on these areas must only
be carried out at an authorized Saab
dealer.
Do not use sun protective film which con-
tains metal particles on the rear window,
this can be the cause of radio interfer-
ence.
The car has a factory-fitted roof antenna for
a mobile phone/OnStar. Roof loads may
negatively affect telecommunication.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Adjusting the frequency steps North
America/Europe
If the car is taken from North America to
Europe, the radio’s frequency steps can be
adjusted.
Fault codes
WARNING
NOTICE
The CD player/CD changer is classified
as Class 1 laser equipment
Great care should be exercised in trying
to rectify a fault. If you are at all unsure,
contact an authorized Saab dealer.
• Press and hold
(mid-segment)
• Service and repair work must only be
carried out by authorized technicians.
and switch the radio on at the same time.
The preset stations will be cancelled and
replaced by default frequencies.
• If the casing is damaged, hazardous
laser radiation can occur.
TheAudio System has abuilt-indiagnostics
function. If a fault is detected, a fault code is
generated to help dealer technicians to
diagnose the fault. Below are the codes for
some faults that you might be able to rectify
yourself.
NOTICE
All work on the Audio System must be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
Fault code
Possible cause
CD/CDC
ERROR
12/17/19
CD is dirty, loaded
wrong side up or defec-
tive.
OnStar System
Your vehicle may be equipped with OnStar,
a vehicle telematics communications and
navigation system. Please consult the sep-
arate chapter in this owner’s manual, page
107.
TAPE ERR 01
Tape broken or
mechanical fault in
deck.
TAPE ERR
02/03
Tape snarled up or
mechanical fault in
deck.
TAPE ERR 11
Cassette jammed: can-
not be loaded/ejected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar - Telematics
Additional Services____
Personal Calling: ___________
112
112
The OnStar Safe & Sound
Plan________________ 110
Automatic notification of air bag
Using OnStar _________ 108
OnStar is Easy______________
OnStar Services Button_______
Emergency button ___________
White dot button ____________
System status light __________
108
108
109
109
109
deployment _______________
Emergency services _________
Roadside assistance _________
Hands-free communication ____
110
110
111
111
111
111
Virtual Advisor: _______
116
117
117
OnStar Subscriber
Website ____________
The OnStar Center_____ 110
Limitations___________
Connecting to the OnStar center
110
The OnStar Premium
Services Plan________ 111
Yourpersonalidentificationnumber
(PIN) ____________________
Additional Information _
Warranty _________________
A Note About Privacy________
Transferring OnStar _________
OnStar Subscription Information
118
118
118
118
118
110
Route support ______________
111
Ride Assist_________________
111
Information and Convenience ser-
vices ____________________
111
112
Online Concierge services_____
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
OnStar - Telematics
Your new vehicle may come equipped with
advanced telematics hardware. OnStar
telematics is a sophisticated in-vehicle
system allowing convergence of wireless
communications, GPS (Global Positioning
System) satellites and advanced vehicle
electronics.
You should activate immediately to ensure
you receive your full year of service, as your
prepaid subscription begins at the time of
delivery.
Your onboard OnStar System consists of
three buttons:
Using OnStar
Welcome to OnStar. This section gives you
all the information you need to get started
using OnStar, including descriptions of all
OnStar services. It also introduces the
added services of Personal Calling, Virtual
advisor,andtheOnstarSubscriberwebsite.
For a complete explanation of these addi-
tional services, please see pages 112, 116
and 117.
OnStar Services Button
Press this button, and you are
connected to an OnStar advi-
sor. You will hear a chime, fol-
lowed by the words
”ConnectingtoOnStar.”Allow
20–30 seconds for initial con-
nection to the OnStar Call
Center. An advisor will then
help you with any of the ser-
vices included in your OnStar
plan.
If cellular service is unavail-
able, OnStar will generate a
fast busy tone. The OnStar
system will retry calls a num-
ber of times before returning
to the ready mode. To cancel
the automatic dialing, press
the White dot button.
NOTE: In order for OnStar to operate, the
car audio system must be switched on.
Here’s how to activate your OnStar ser-
vice:
OnStar is Easy
1 Push the blue OnStar button located in
your Saab. After a prerecorded mes-
sage explaining the benefits of OnStar,
you will be greeted by a live OnStar advi-
sor. The advisor will activate your
OnStar service.
2 Provide the information requested by
the advisor to activate your account and
set up your personal profile. This will
take approximately 10–15 minutes. You
can also provide OnStar with customer
and driver information on their website
at www.onstarenrollment.com. You will
receive an e-mail confirmation with an
OnStar account number. Once youhave
received this information, complete the
enrollment process from the car by
pushing the blue OnStar button.
If your new Saab has OnStar, it’s easy to
start using your OnStar system. In fact,
pressingtheOnStar buttonis usually allyou
need to do. Once you are connected, an
OnStar advisor will help you with the ser-
vices in your plan.
Inoperative if battery is discharged or
disconnected.
OnStar ispoweredbyyour vehicle´s battery
and will not operate if the battery is dis-
charged or disconnected.
Potentially inoperative if vehicle is in a
crash
If your vehicle is in a crash, some compo-
nents could be damaged or disconnected,
potentially rendering OnStar inoperative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar - Telematics 109
The OnStar Center is the heart of your ser-
vice — staffed 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week with knowledgeable OnStar advisors.
Even on weekends and holidays, there is
always someone ready to help.
System status light
Emergency button
Solid Green — Indicates the OnStar
system in the vehicle is powered ON and
ready to make calls or receive calls from the
OnStar Center.
In an emergency, press this
button to connect with an
OnStar advisor. Your call will
be given the highest priority,
and you will hear a tone fol-
lowed by the words ”Connect-
ingtoOnStarEmergency.”An
advisor will locate your Saab,
find out what kind of assis-
tance you require, and con-
tact the nearest emergency
services provider who can
dispatch ambulance, fire,
police or other emergency
services. Please use this but-
ton only for true emergencies.
OnStar uses sophisticated Global Position-
Saab, and wireless technology to provide
the communications link and seamless inte-
gration into your Saab. This system allows
the OnStar advisors to pinpoint yourSaab´s
location precisely. This way, advisors can
provide you with a range of helpful services
to protect you and your Saab. Plus, with the
Premium Services Plan* included for 12
months with your Saab, advisors can also
access an extensive database to assist you
other convenience services.
Blinking Green — The light blinks green to
indicate a call is being connected or in
progress. If you notice this light blinking
while you are not on a call, press the White
dot button.
Red — This signals that your OnStar
system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button to attempt to con-
tact an OnStar advisor. If the connection is
made, the advisor will assist you in making
sure your OnStar system is operating prop-
erly. If you cannot contact the OnStar Cen-
ter,pleasetakeyourcartothenearestSaab
dealer for diagnosis and service.
White dot button
*) New retail deliveries only.
Press this button at the end of a
call. You’ll hear the words
”OnStar Request Ended.”
Also, press this button to
answer a call from the OnStar
Center, or cancel a call if one
of the other buttons is acci-
dentally pressed. This button
is also used to access OnStar
Personal Calling services
which are described on page
112.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
OnStar - Telematics
Yourpersonal identification number
(PIN)
The OnStar Center
Connecting to the OnStar center
In addition to using the 3-button system
found in your Saab, there are two other
ways to connect to the OnStar Center.
The OnStar Safe &
Sound Plan
When you signed up with OnStar, you were
asked to provide a Personal Identification
Number (PIN). You’ll need your PIN to
access many of OnStar’s services. If, for
example, your vehicle has been stolen, an
OnStar advisor will ask for your PIN in order
to provide assistance.
Changing your PIN is easy. Call the OnStar
Center and provide the advisor with your
current number, and he or she will assist
you in setting up a new number. If you have
forgotten your PIN, just call the OnStar Cen-
ter. For security reasons, we will send your
PIN to you in the mail.
The OnStar Safe and Sound Plan is one of
three plans you can purchase.* With it, you
have access to a complete range of ser-
vices providing you with an unsurpassed
level of safety and security — 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week. And you have it all at
the touch of a button.
Toll-Free Call
To take advantage of your OnStar services
fromoutside your Saab, youcancallOnStar
toll-free at 1-888-4-OnStar
(1-888-466-7827). Remember to have your
Personal Identification Number (PIN)
handy.
So whether you’re on a lonesome country
road or stuck in highway traffic, you have at
your disposal a complete range of services
providing you with unsurpassed security.
And you have it all at the touch of a button.
Automatic Notification
A priority signal will be sent to the OnStar
Center with your exact location if an airbag
deploys.
Automatic notification of air bag
deployment
Should your front air bags deploy, a priority
signal will be sent to the OnStar Center with
your Saab´s location (as long as cellular
service and the vehicle’s electrical system
are operable). An advisor will attempt to
contact you to assess the nature of your
emergency, and then notify the appropriate
emergency services provider.
(Vehicle electrical system and cellular service
must be operable.)
Emergency services
Should you require emergency assistance,
press the red emergency button and On
Star or an advisor will contact the nearest
emergency services provider with your
exact location and your request for help.
* New retail deliveries only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar - Telematics 111
Roadside assistance**
Hands-free communication
The OnStar Directions &
Connections Plan
There’s nothing worse than being stranded
on the road with car trouble. No matter what
the problem is (flat tire, out of gas, or engine
trouble), just call OnStar. They will contact
the helpyouneed to get youquickly backon
the road.
Talking to an OnStar advisor is easy and
hands-free. Simply press the OnStar but-
ton, and a small microphone picks up your
voice while the OnStar advisor talks to you
through your stereo speakers. Note: Audio
system must be switched on. You can even
adjust the volume to your liking with the
steering wheel controls or the radio volume
knob. Your hands remain on the steering
wheel, while your eyes remain on the road.
Route support
With OnStar Route Support, an advisor can
help youfindyour way, no matter how far off
course you are. You can get exact street
directions, or guidance to nearby gas sta-
tions, restaurants, hotels or ATMs.
Stolen vehicle tracking
OnStar doesn’t just protect you, it protects
yourSaab, too. Ifyourvehicleis everstolen,
just contact OnStar by calling
Ride Assist
If you need a lift, anytime of the day or night,
just call OnStar. They’ll contact transporta-
tion and send it right to you.
Being safe on the road is important, but
there’s more to life than security. There’s liv-
ing. That’s why we have created the OnStar
Directions and Connections Plan. It gives
you not only the important protections of the
Safe and Sound Plan, but also a whole
range of serviceswhich truly changedriving
from a chore to a luxury.
1-888-4-ONSTAR. They will put you in
touch with the authorities and aid them in
locating your Saab. Ask your insurance car-
rier about possible premium discounts.
Information and Convenience ser-
vices
Accident Assist™
OnStar advisors have access to over five
million service listings including hotels, res-
taurants, gas stations, dealerships, hospi-
tals, ATMs and airports — more than 250
service categories in all. OnStar advisors
can even assist you with hotel and restau-
rant reservations.
Accident Assist™ provides step-by-step
guidance about what to do in case of a
crash. Working with leading insurance com-
panies OnStar has developed a ”best prac-
tices” list to assist you through most acci-
dent situations. OnStar Accident Assist™
can make the process of completing a
police report and/or insurance claim less
stressful.
**There will be no charge for Roadside Assistance as
long as your vehicle is under warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
OnStar - Telematics
Online Concierge services
Signing Up for Personal Calling
As an OnStar subscriber, the Personal Call-
ing capability is already built into your
Additional Services
From shopping to travel to entertainment
and more, OnStar’s online concierge can
help you make the most of your time. Login
to www.myonstar.com and simply select a
city, choose a category and ask away. Get
instant answers in a live online chat with an
OnStar Advisor or send an E-mail if you pre-
fer. You can also view OnStar’s recommen-
dations for top picks in eight categories like
dining, travel and sports and recreation.
Personal Calling
If you are an OnStar Safe and Sound Plan
or Directions and Connections Plan sub-
scriber, you have access to OnStar Per-
sonal Calling. OnStar Personal Calling pro-
vides you with a nationwide wireless phone
service in your Saab that you can activate
simply by pressing a button and using your
voice. You can use Personal Calling in your
Saab to place or to receive calls. The
voice-activated system will dial the number.
Your party will answer through your stereo
speakers.
With OnStar Personal Calling, you can
enjoy the simplicity of a one-touch wireless
connection. Whether you are placing or
receiving a call, once you press the button,
you never have to take your hands off the
wheel or your eyes off the road. The ease of
the hands-free communication service
allows you to enjoy an even greater level of
safety, security and convenience while driv-
ing.
Saab’s OnStar hardware. In order to use
this service, an OnStar advisor must set up
your cellular account. You must also pro-
vide a credit card in order to establish your
prepaid cellular account. Usage charges
will be deducted from this prepaid account
of”units.” Unitsareeasily replenished using
the credit card on file at OnStar. Once you
signupforOnStarPersonal Calling, you will
be given your own personal phone number
that others can use to call into your Saab.
To sign up for Personal Calling,
simply
• Press the OnStar button in your Saab.
• Inform the advisor that you would like to
sign up for Personal Calling.
• The advisor will set up your account.
You will need to provide account and
credit card information.
This new service is not yet available in all
areas. Complete availability in the U.S. is
anticipated in 2001*. For system limitations
and details, call OnStar at
1-800-ONSTAR-7.
* Availability in Canada was undetermined at time of
publication. Please contact your local dealer in Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar - Telematics 113
Voice Commands
Universal Commands
Help– The system will provide a list of avail-
able commands.
Clear – When you are entering digits, this
command will erase the last digit entered.
To dial using a ”Nametag”:
Personal Calling is made available through
your voice commands to the system. This
allows you to verbally control all of the
phone functions.
1 Press the
OnStar will respond
OnStarWhite ”Ready”
Dot button
Your OnStar wireless phone system has
beenprogrammed to respondto awide vari-
ety of voices and accents. You should
speak distinctly in a normal speaking vol-
ume. It is not necessary to exaggerate your
voice or to speak loudly. Speak numerical
digits one at a time, and then wait for confir-
mation before going to the next digit.
Cancel– This command takes you from the
currentfunctiontothe”Ready”prompt.Ifthe
lastresponsefromthesystemwas”Ready,”
this command will exit voice recognition.
2 Say ”CALL”
OnStar will respond
”Nametag Please”
3 Say ”<stored OnStar will respond
nametag>”
”Calling
<nametag>”, then
make the call
Placing a Call
There are three ways to place a call:
1 By usinga particular number, say ”DIAL”
2 By using a stored nametag, say ”CALL”
3 By dialing the last number, say
”REDIAL”
To redial the last number dialed:
Voice Command Error Messages
Pardon – The system has not been able to
match your command with a word that it
knows. Repeating the command distinctly
should fix the problem.
Slower Please – Repeat the command
after a short pause. This response normally
happens if you say a command before the
system is ready for it orifthere is substantial
background noise.
1 Press the
OnStarWhite ”Ready”
Dot button
OnStar will respond
To dial a number:
2 Say ”REDIAL” OnStar will respond
”Redialing”, then
1 Press the
OnStar will respond
OnStarWhite ”Ready”
make the call
Dot button
Receiving a Call
2 Say ”DIAL”
OnStar will respond
”Number Please”
If someone calls your wireless phone num-
ber, the entertainment system in your Saab
will mute (if it is on), and you will hear a
phone ringing sound. To answer the call,
simply press the White Dot button.
3 Say the 1st
Digit
OnStar will repeat the
number
4 Say the 2nd
Digit
OnStar will repeat the
number
Ending a Call
Continue saying numbers in this man-
ner until finished
When your call is finished, press the White
Dot button to end the call. It is not possible
to end a call using voice commands.
5 Say ”DIAL”
OnStar will respond
”Dialing <number>,”
then make the call
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
OnStar - Telematics
Storing/Deleting Numbers in
Memory
Deleting a Number from Memory
To delete a nametag:
Units Remaining
OnStar keeps track of the amount of calling
time you have purchased and used in units.
The number of total remaining units is
storedwithintheOnStarsystem,andcanbe
accessed easily.
(Nametags)
1 Press the
OnStarWhite
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
Storing a number
Your OnStar system can store up to 20
numbers (up to 32 digits each) in memory
that can be dialed by simply repeating the
”nametag.”
2 Say ”DELETE” OnStar will respond
”Nametag Please”
1 Press the
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
OnStar White
Dot button
3 Say
OnStar will respond
To store a number:
”<nametag>” ”Delete <nametag>,
YES or NO”
2 Say ”Units”
OnStar will respond
”Verify or Add”
1 Press the
OnStarWhite ”Ready”
Dot button
OnStar will respond
4 Say ”YES”
OnStar will respond
”Deleting
<nametag>”
3 Say ”Verify”
OnStar will respond
”You have # units
remaining”
2 Say ”STORE” OnStar will respond
”Number Please”
Setting Tone or Voice Response
Your system comes from the factory with
voice responses to your commands to con-
firm that the system received the command
or number you intended. For example,
when you are entering a number, OnStar
repeats the number back to you. You may
change the system to respond with a tone
response if you prefer. A ready tone, a digit
tone, oragoodbyetonewillrespondinstead
of the voice. All other responses will still be
by voice.
3 Say the 1st
Digit
OnStar will repeat the
number
Adding More Calling Minutes / Units
You can charge additional calling units with
automatic refill by contacting OnStar, or by
authorizing automatic unit refill on the
OnStar subscriber website. For more infor-
mation about the OnStar subscriber web-
site, please see page 117.
4 Say the 2nd
Digit
OnStar will repeat the
digit
Continue saying numbers in this manner
until finished
5 Say ”STORE” OnStar will respond
Automatic Replenishment
again
”Nametag Please”
If you run out of units during a call, your call
willbeterminatedandyouwillbeconnected
to OnStar for approval to replenish. You will
be warned at the beginning of a call when
you have ten or fewer calling units remain-
ing.
6 Say ”<new
nametag>”
OnStar will respond
”Again”
7 Say ”<new
nametag>”
OnStar will respond
”Once More”
1 Press the
OnStar will respond
OnStarWhite ”Ready”
8 Say ”<new
nametag>”
OnStar will respond
”Storing <nametag>”
Dot button
2 Say ”Voice
Feedback”
OnStar will respond
”Voice Feedback is
now ON/OFF”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar - Telematics 115
Contact OnStar
Security/Locking your System
You can set up a four-digit Personal Secu-
rity Code to ensure that unauthorized
people do not use the calling capability of
your system. With security set to ON, the
systemwillnotallowanypersonalcalls.You
must turn security OFF before calls can be
made.
Volume Control
The volume of the audio portion of Personal
Calling is controlled with your steering
wheel volume controls or with the radio
volume knob.
1 Press the
OnStar
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
White Dot
button
2 Say ”Units” OnStar will respond
”Verify or Add”
3 Say ”Add”
You will be connected to
OnStar for replenish-
ment
1 Press the
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
OnStar White
Dot button
2 Say ”Security”
OnStar will respond
”Enter Four-Digit
Security Code”
You will need your OnStar Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN) to authorize the
charge to your credit card on file.
3 Say the 1st Digit OnStar will repeat
the digit
If you are not in your Saab, you may call an
OnStar Advisor at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to request unit replenish-
ment.
4 Say the 2nd Digit OnStar will repeat
the digit
5 Say the 3rd Digit OnStar will repeat
the digit
6 Say the 4th Digit OnStar reply ”Secu-
rity (code # # # #) is
now ON/OFF”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
OnStar - Telematics
Calling the Virtual Advisor
1 Press the OnStar will respond
Weather
Virtual Advisor
The OnStar Virtual advisor will deliver an
up-to-date weather forecast for the current
location of the vehicle. The forecast
includes current temperature, daily
high/low, tomorrow’s high/low, precipitation
forecast, and unusual conditions.
(expected availability fourth quarter 2000)
Once you have activated Personal Calling,
you can enjoy your time in your Saab even
more with the OnStar Virtual Advisor. This
service allows you to listen to your favorite
news and information topics, such as
weather reports, stock quotes and sports
scores. You can even listen to your e-mail,
whenever you want, without ever taking
your eyes off the road. Using simple voice
commands, you can browse your personal
topics and skip or listen to those you
choose. You can also search for additional
information on special topics that interest
you.
To find out how to set up a customized pro-
file, visit the OnStar subscriber website at
www.onstar.com, or turn to the OnStar sub-
scriber website section on page 31 of this
guide. If you do not have Internet access,
you can still take advantage of the OnStar
Virtual Advisor services as a default profile
will be set up for you. *
OnStarWhite ”Ready”
Dot button
2 Say ”Virtual
Advisor”
You will be connected
to Virtual Advisor
Stock Quotes
The OnStar Virtual advisor can provide you
with current quotes for the stocks you have
specified in your customized profile as well
as other requested stocks. All market data
is delayed by twenty minutes. If you have
not set your profile, you can still access the
stock quote feature through your default
profile and then request the stock of your
choice.
Getting Information from the Virtual
Advisor
The OnStar Virtual Advisor will prompt you
for information you desire. These offerings
will change to provide you with services and
information that you and other subscribers
want and need. The prompts are very clear
and easy to understand and use.
Information Available
Sports Scores
OnStar will continue to add new features
and categories to the Virtual Advisor. The
followinggeneralcategorieswillgiveyouan
overview of the types of information avail-
able to you. For complete up-to-date cate-
gories, you can go to the Saab Cars USA,
Inc. website at www.saabusa.com or the
OnStar website at www.onstar.com, and
then click on the link to the subscriber web-
site.
The OnStar Virtual advisor can provide you
with scoresfor your favoritecollegeandpro-
fessional teams with up-to-the- minute high-
lights, even if they are being broadcast on a
local station. See the team selection option
in your Mobile Profiler section of the sub-
scriber section of OnStar.com.
If you have not set your profile or are still
using the default profile, you can access the
sports option of the Virtual advisor and ask
for an update on your favorite sport. You
always have access to the options in the Vir-
tual Advisor.
*Availability in Canada was undetermined
at the time of publication. Please contact
your local dealer in Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar - Telematics 117
News Headlines
OnStar Subscriber
Website
Limitations
The OnStar Virtual Advisor will provide cur-
rent headlines for many different catego-
ries, including:
Not withstanding anything contained
herein, OnStar's nonperformance hereun-
der shall be excused if caused by act or
omission of a cellular carrier or a third-party
service provider, equipment failure, acts of
God, strikes, equipment or facility shortage,
or other causes beyond OnStar’s reason-
able control. In addition, the liability of
OnStar, if any, for any mistake, omission,
interruption, delay, error, defect or other fail-
ure in the service furnished, or in the equip-
ment used in furnishing service, shall in no
event exceed the amount of OnStar’s
charges to subscriber for said service
during the period so affected, provided that
no liability shall result for outages of 24
hours or less.
If you are an OnStar subscriber, you have
access to the OnStar subscriber website.
Thesubscriber website will provide youwith
important facts about your OnStar subscrip-
tion and allow you to customize your Virtual
Advisor Mobile Profile. All this allows you to
access up-to-the-minute information that
canmake yourdriving experience safer and
more enjoyable.
• International News Headlines
• National News Headlines
• Technology Headlines
• Business Headlines
• Sports Headlines
• Entertainment Headlines
E-mail Reader
The subscriber website was designed to
provide you with easy access to personal-
ized information, learn more about OnStar,
update your account information, plan your
travel, receive weather information and
interact with OnStar.
Toaccessthesubscriberwebsite,simplygo
to www.onstar.com, and then click on the
OnStar subscriber link. The OnStar Sub-
scriber website is a secured site that is
password protected. You will be required to
provide your OnStar account number and
personal identification number (PIN). If you
do not know your account number or PIN,
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR. For
security reasons, your PIN will be mailed to
your address on record.
The OnStar Virtual Advisor allows you to lis-
ten, and soon respond, to your e-mails any
time you want. E-mail availability is based
on the address(es) you provide to OnStar.
Every Virtual Advisor enrollee will receive
an E-mail account.
This manual includes the latest information
at the time it was printed. We reserve the
right to make changes to the products and
services without prior notification.
In order to provide you with excellent ser-
vice, any call to the OnStar Center may be
monitored or recorded.
All features may not be available on all mod-
els. Please consult your dealer for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
OnStar - Telematics
Transferring OnStar
OnStar Operation:
Additional Information
OnStar uses existing emergency service
providers and cellular and satellite technol-
ogies. OnStar requires cellular servicetobe
available and operating for features to func-
tion properly.
Because your OnStar 3-button system is an
integralpartofyour Saab, itcannot betrans-
ferred to another vehicle. Each OnStar
system stays with the original car or truck in
which it was installed.
Warranty
OnStariswarrantedaspartoftheSaabnew
vehicle limited warranty.
A Note About Privacy
AtOnStar,weknowyouwanttoprotectyour
privacy, and we take subscriber privacy
very seriously. We never provide your per-
sonal information to another company or
person unless you authorize it, or we are
required to by the legal process, or in such
cases where you have provided it for billing
purposes or you have requested a hotel res-
ervation, are sending flowers, etc. Having
this information on file with OnStar is a real
advantage and helps you avoid repeating
your credit card information over a cellular
connection. Your trust is what we most
value.
The one-year OnStar prepaid subscription
applicable to new retail deliveries cannot be
transferred to another vehicle. However, if
you’ve purchased additional years of ser-
vice and decide to dispose of your Saab,
any remaining service will be refunded to
you. Or, if you choose, you can have it trans-
ferred to another vehicle on your account.
Any service that is refunded or transferred
will be prorated at the monthly rate in effect
at the time of transfer.
Personal Calling:
Existing OnStar service agreement
required. Additional usage charges apply
for Personal Calling. Interim 2001 model
year availability in select markets. For
system limitations and details, call
1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.
Virtual Advisor:
Existing OnStar and Personal Calling ser-
vice agreement required. Additional usage
charges apply for Personal Calling. Interim
2001 model year availability in select mar-
kets. For system limitations and details, call
1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.
OnStar Subscription Information
To renew your subscription or upgrade your
plan, just push the OnStar button, or call the
OnStar customer service department at
1-888-864-2801 between 7 am and 12 pm
EST Monday-Friday; 8 am and 5 pm on Sat-
urday.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 119
Interior equipment
and trunk
Steering wheel
adjustment__________
Rearview mirrors______
Electric windows______
Sunroof _____________
Interior lighting _______
Sun visors ___________
Ashtrays_____________
Glove compartment ___
Cup holders__________
Trunk _______________
Spare wheel and tools _
Fuel filler door________
120
121
127
128
130
131
131
132
134
135
145
146
Opening the fuel filler
door in an emergency_
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
Interior equipment and trunk
Steering wheel
adjustment
Fore-and-aft and tilt adjustment of the steer-
ing wheel is possible.
Pull down the lever fully until you hear a
click.Movethesteeringwheeltothedesired
position and then raise the lever. The lever
should lock with a click.
Make sure that the lever is fully locked
before driving off.
WARNING
Horn
The hornis sounded by pressing the central
part of the steering wheel. Press closest to
the steering wheel rim.
Never adjust the steering wheel unless
the car is stationary.
To adjust the steering wheel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 121
Adjusting the door mirrors
1 Select mirror
2 Use touch pad to adjust mirror
Door mirror folded in
Button for angling passenger’s mirror
down on reversing
The adjusting switch is on the driver’s door.
If the car is equipped with a programmable
driver’s seat, the settingsof the door mirrors
can also be stored in the preset buttons for
the seat (see page 14).
Cars equipped with a programmable
driver’s seat also have the ability to angle
the passenger’s mirror down when revers-
ing, e.g. for a better view of the curb.
The mirrors are heated, and the heating
comesonandgoesoffwiththerear-window
heater.
Rearview mirrors
Door mirrors
The door mirrors have auto dimming func-
tion (option) and the passenger side door
mirror is of the wide-angle ‘‘aspheric” type.
The door mirrors are designed to fold back
if knocked. They can also be fully retracted
for parking in tight spaces, such as on the
car deck of a ferry. Remember to fold them
out again before driving off.
1 Select reverse.
2 Press the tiny button adjacent to the
doormirror switch to tilt the mirror. The
mirror will be reset automatically when
reverse gear is deselected.
The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-
ually by gently pressing the glass in the
desired direction.
NOTICE
The door mirrors should be fully retracted
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Interior equipment and trunk
Interior rearview mirror with garage
opener, autodimming and compass
(certain variants only)
WARNING
Makesurethatpeopleandobjectsareout
of the way of a moving door or gate to pre-
vent potential harm or damage.
When programming the garage opener,
you may be operating a garage door or
gate operator. Therefore it is advised to
park outside of the garage.
Rearview mirror
1 Day position
2 Night position
Buttons for garage opener and compass
1-3 Garage opener
Do not use the garage opener with any
garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by
federal safety standards. (This includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an
object, signalling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
4 LED
5 Compass/auto dimming ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
Rearview mirror
The rearview mirror has day/night positions
that can be selected by means of a knob
beneath the mirror. Adjust the mirror in day
position.
Retain youroriginal garage door transmitter
for future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested
that upon the sale of the vehicle, the pro-
grammed garage opener buttons beerased
for security purposes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 123
Preparations for first-time programming
transmitter should face the mirror from
below or left side of the mirror.
4 Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen and hand-held transmitter but-
tons. Do not release the buttons until
step 5 has been completed.
Note: Some gate operators and garage
door openers may require you to replace
this Programming Step 4 with procedures
noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-
gramming" section.
5 After the indicator light changes from a
slow to a rapidly blinking light, release
ter buttons.
6 Press and hold the just-trained button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the button is pressed and released.
Note: To program the remaining two but-
tons, begin with "Programming" - step
three. Do not repeat step two.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two
seconds and then turns to a constant
light continue with "Programming"
steps 7-9 to complete the programming of
a rolling code equipped device (most com-
monly a garage door opener).
antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
8 Firmly press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Before programming the garage opener for
the first time, you must delete any factory
codes.
Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not
holdforlongerthat 30 seconds. Thegarage
opener is now in the train(orlearning)mode
and can be programmed at any time begin-
ning with "Programming" - step 2.
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to ini-
tiate step nine.
9 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeatthissequencea thirdtimetocom-
plete the programming process.
The garage opener should now activate
your rolling code equipped device.
Note: To program the remaining two but-
tons, begin with "Programming" - step
three. Do not repeat step two.
Programming
Thegarageopenercanrecordandstorethe
frequencies of three different remote con-
trols.
The battery in the remote control should be
fairly new for programming to work well.
Do not repeat "Programming" - step two
to train additional devices to a second or
third button. Begin with "Programming" -
step three.
1 Turn the ignition ON.
2 Press and hold the two outer buttons
(buttons one and three) - releasing only
when the indicator light begins to flash
(after 20 seconds). Do not hold the but-
tons for longer than 30 seconds and do
not repeat step two to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmit-
ter to the remaining two buttons.
3 Position the endof your hand-held trans-
mitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away from
the button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view. The
7 At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
Interior equipment and trunk
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Reprogramming a single button
Erasing the three buttons
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission -
which may not be long enough for the
garage opener to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
"time-out" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
culties programming a gate operator by
using the "Programming" procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
"Programming " step 4 with the following:
To program a device to the garage opener
using a button previously trained, follow
these steps:
To erase programming from the three but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be erased
but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
1 Press and hold the desired button. DO
NOT release the button.
2 Theindicatorlightwillbegintoflashafter
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, proceed with "Programming" -
step 3.
• Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The
garage opener is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed
atanytimebeginningwith"Programming"
- step 3.
Note: Ifprogrammingagaragedooropener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the "cycling" process to pre-
vent possible overheating.
4 Continue to press and hold the button
while you press and release - every two
seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmit-
ter until the frequency signal has success-
fully been accepted by the garage opener.
(The indicator light willflash slowly and then
rapidly.)
Proceed with "Programming" step five to
complete.
NOTICE
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while
programming using the "cycling" method
to prevent damaging the electrical motor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 125
Opening a garage door
Rearview mirrors with auto dimming
function (accessory/option)
The autodimming is activated and deacti-
vated with a short push on button 2.
If the mirror is equipped with Garage Door
Opener (option) the letter 1 is displayed on
compass bearing display briefly when auto
dimming is activated. When deactivating
the letter 0 is displayed.
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed button. Activation will now
occurforthetraineddevice(i.e.garagedoor
opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.
The interior rearview mirror has two sen-
sors, one forward-facing and one rear-fac-
ing. They also activate and deactivate the
auto dimming feature on door mirrors.
The system is activated when the for-
ward-facing sensor detects that it is dark
outside and the rear-facing sensor detects.
For example, if the car following has not
dimmeditsheadlights.Therearviewmirrors
arethendarkenedtopreventthestronglight
source from dazzling the driver. This dark-
ening is stepless.
NOTICE
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while pro-
gramming using the "cycling" method to
prevent damaging the electrical motor.
1 Forward-facing sensor
2 ON/OFF switch, auto dimming function
3 Rear-facing sensor
The mirrors return to their normal states
when the strong light source diminishes.
The auto dimming function can be turned
OFFwiththeswitchontheloweredgeofthe
rear-view mirror.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
must accept any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
NOTE
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
sense light from the trailer.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
Interior equipment and trunk
Compass
The compass is integrated in the rearview
mirror. The compass bearing is displayed in
the top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
updated every other second. The compass
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
E, etc.
Switch the compass display on and off by
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds.
Compass zones in Canada
Compass zones in US
Changing zones
Calibration
The earth’s magnetic fields vary depending
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
your car from one magnetic zone to another
thecompasssettingwillneedtobechanged
to ensure a correct bearing.
Calibration is performed automatically
during travel. If an accessory, such as a
mobile phone, is fitted and it can be
assumed that the compass is affected, the
compass may need to be calibrated manu-
ally.
1 Study the illustrations to determine the
correct zone.
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).
The zone number setting now is also
shown.
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
zone number. There are 15 zones from
which to choose. Once the correct zone
is selected, release the button and wait
4 seconds. The compass will now
display the bearing.
1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
the compass bearing are displayed
(approx. 9 s).
2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 127
Electric windows
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when the
side windows are being wound up.
• Always remove the ignition key when
you leave the car to prevent personal
injury caused by the electric windows,
for example, due to children playing.
• The person operating the electric win-
dows is responsible for ensuring that
no one, especially children, has their
head, hands or fingers in the window
openings, before raising the windows.
Raising the windows could otherwise
cause serious or fatal injuries.
1 Window switches
2 Switch for rendering rear door window switches inoperative
To open:
To close:
Front windows: press the front of the switch
Rearwindows:Presstheback oftheswitch.
Front windows: Lift the front of the switch.
Rear windows: Lift the back of the switch.
The electric motors of the front windows are
equipped with overload protection (inte-
grated thermal protection). This protection
operates when the windows are wound
down automatically (switch pressed fully
down).
The switches for the front windows have a
third position for automatic opening of the
window.Presstheswitchfullydowntolower
the window completely.
To cancel automatic lowering of the win-
dow, lift the switch briefly.
The actuating motor will be switched off
automatically when the window is fully
closed or when the switch is released.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
Interior equipment and trunk
Child safety: rear windows (ON/OFF)
The window switches on the rear doors can
be rendered inoperative by the ON/OFF
switch in the panel on the center console.
Sunroof
(Option in Canada) (certain variants)
When the switch is ON, the rear side win-
dowscanbeoperatedbytheswitchoneach
rear door. The switch’s back lighting will be
activated.
When the switch is OFF, the rear side win-
dows can only be operated from the panel
on the center console. When off, the
switch’s back lighting will also be switched
off.
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the sunroof.
• Always remove the ignition key when
you leave the car to prevent personal
injury caused by the electric sunroof,
for example, due to children playing.
Switch for rear side window
• The person operating the electric sun-
roof isresponsiblefor ensuring thatno
one, especially children, has their
head, hands or fingers in the opening,
before closing the sunroof. Operating
the sunroof could otherwise cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Thesunroofis operatedbytheswitchonthe
overhead panel above the rearview mirror.
The sunroof can be opened partially or fully.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 129
1
3
2
Sunroof control
1 To open
Manual operation of sunroof
2 To close
3 Ventilation position
Emergency operation of sunroof
Inanemergency(e.g. ifthereisanelectrical
failure) the sunroof can be operated by a
screwdriver. Remove the cover at the front
of the sunroof opening, insert a screwdriver
in the groove, and rotate.
The sunroof incorporates an interior, man-
ual, sliding sun blind.
To open:
• Slide the control towards the rear to open
the sunroof to the comfort position.
To open it fully, slide the control back a
second time. Press the control to stop it
earlier.
After the car has been waxed, the sunroof
may squeak or squeal on opening to the
ventilationposition. Ifthis shouldoccur, fully
open the sunroof and, using washer fluid,
washthe sealalong the frontedge, together
with the paintwork that is in contact with the
seal when the roof is closed.
Rotate counterclockwise to close sunroof.
To close:
• Slidethecontrolforwardsuntilthesunroof
is closed.
Ventilation position
• Press themiddleof the control(when sun-
roof closed).
• To close: slide the control forwards.
To fully open the sunroof from the ventila-
tion position, slide the control back.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
Interior equipment and trunk
1
1
2
2
3
1
1 Interior lighting on continuously
2 Lighting comes on when a door is opened
3 Lighting always off
1 Reading lights
2 Dome light
• When the car is unlocked from the out-
side.
• When any door is opened.
• When the ignition key is withdrawn from
the ignition switch.
When the switchontheoverheadpanelis in
the mid-position, the lighting is switched off
automatically30 seconds after the lastdoor
has been closed or when the ignition is
switched ON.
There is also a light in the sun visors. The
light comes on when the cover over the
vanity mirror is opened.
When the ignition is OFF, if a door has been
left open for 20 minutes, the interior lighting
willbeswitchedoffautomaticallytosavethe
battery.
Luggage-compartment lighting
The luggage-compartment lighting comes
on automatically when the trunk is opened
and goes out when the trunk is closed.
Interior lighting
The interior lighting consists of one dome
light in the front and one in the back, a
map-reading light in the front, two reading
lights in the back, floor courtesy lights in the
front (in some model variants) and door
courtesy lights on all doors.
The lighting will also be switched off auto-
matically after 20 minutes if the trunk has
been left open.
The courtesy lights come on automatically
when the respective door is opened. Each
reading light has its own switch adjacent to
the lamp.
The switch for the dome lights is on the front
overhead panel. When the switch is in the
mid-position (door-activated), the interior
lighting will come on:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 131
1
2
Sun visor
Front ashtray
Rear ashtray
1 Press soft to open/close
2 Pull out one side at an angle
Sun visors
To refit, line up the slots on either side and
slide it closed.
Rear ashtrays
The car is equipped with double sun visors.
One section of the visor can be indepen-
dently pivoted to the side window.
Ashtrays
(accessory)
Open the lid to use ashtray.
The car can be equipped with three ash-
trays: one in the instrument panel fascia,
andoneineachreardoor.Acigarettelighter
is fitted adjacent to the front ashtray, and
there is also one in the back of the center
console.
Avanitymirrorisprovidedonthebackofthe
sun visors. The vanity mirrors are illumi-
nated when the cover is raised.
Toremovetheashtray, fullyopenthelidand
lift the ashtray straight out.
To refit the ashtray, make sure it engages
the two square recesses in the door trim.
Front ashtray
1 To open the ashtray, push gently on the
center/upper part of the front and
release to allow it to spring out.
2 Close the ashtray in the same way.
Toremovetheashtray,openitandafterthat
pull left side out at an angle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
Interior equipment and trunk
Cigarette lighters
(accessory/certain markets only)
Glove compartment
1
WARNING
The car is provided with cigarette lighters
next to the front ashtray and in the rear end
of the center console.
The cigarette lighter socket can also be
used as power point, e.g. for a mobile
phone. The ignition should be in the ON
position.
The glove compartment must be closed
while travelling. An open glove compart-
ment door could cause leg injuries in the
event of a crash.
2
The glove compartment can be cooled by
the air conditioning (ACC) system. Cold air
can be directed to the glove compartment
for keeping drinks cool, etc.
Slide the cover towards you to admit cold
air.
The cigarette lighter sockets can also be
used for accessories (e.g. to charge a
mobile phone) when the ignition is ON.
Glove compartment.
1 To lock
2 To unlock
WARNING
Additional storage facilities are provided
(see next page).
The maximum combined load for the two
cigarette lighter sockets is 240 W (20 A).
Sliding cover in glove compartment to
admit cold air
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 133
In the doors
On leading edge of front seats
On the back of the front seats (certain
variants only)
Console between front seats
Center armrest for rear seat (option)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
Interior equipment and trunk
WARNING
1
• The cup holder should not be used to
holdcupsmadeofchina, glassorhard
plasticas thesecancause injuryinthe
event of a crash.
• Use only for paper cups or aluminium
cans.
2
• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks.
• Avoid putting oversized cups in the
cup holder.
Cup holder in fascia
1 Press symbol to open
2 Lift bottom to close
Cup holder in rear armrest (certain vari-
ants only)(
Press the edge to open/close.
NOTICE
Cup holders
Take care not to spill any liquid on the
audio system when using the cup
holders. Soft drinks in particular can
cause malfunction.
Cup holders are provided in the instrument
panel fascia, in the center console compart-
ment between the front seats, and in the
rear-seat armrest (certain variants only).
Cup holder in center console
To access the cup holder in the instrument
panel, press the symbol and release.
To access the cup holder in the rear seat
armrest, lower the armrest and press the
front edge of the holder. Close in the same
way.
The number of cup holders provided may
vary between models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 135
2
Trunk
1
3
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan
The rear seat is split and the two sections can be folded indepen-
dently. Folding down of the rear seat is easier if the front seats are
not all the way back, and the rear head restraints are folded down.
1 Raise the rear seatcushions by pulling theloop locatedbetween
the cushion and the backrest.
2 Tip the seat cushion forward.
3 Pressthebuttonadjacenttotherespectivebackresttoreleaseit.
4 Fold down the backrest.
4
WARNING
• Rear-seat passengers should always ensure that the head
restraint is raised and in proper position for the seats to be
occupied.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
Outer safety belt hooked onto courtesy handle
• Never place heavy objects on the rear window shelf. There is
always a danger of loose objects flying about and causing
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
crash.
• Before folding up the backrest, hang the outer safety belts
onto the hook on the respective courtesy handle to prevent
them from becoming trapped.
• Check that the back rest release button (3) is flush with the
surround before entering the rear seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Interior equipment and trunk
WARNING
• Place heavy items closest to the backrest and stow smaller
and lighter items on top.
• Never overload the cargo net. If the elastic breaks this may
causepersonalinjury. Donotuseacargonetthatshowssigns
of wear.
• Secure heavy and bulky items using the tie down points
provided in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage
flying around if the car should brake suddenly or be involved
in a crash (see page 137).
• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down or the
load-through hatch is open. Small items can also be thrown
around inside the car and cause personal injury.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 270).
• Make sure that the seat cushions and backrests are properly
secured when folding them back to their normal position.
Check that the button (item 3 on page 135) is flush with the
surround before entering the back seat.
The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot during
driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading the car so
that children, for example, do not burn themselves.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 137
Trunk pass-through hatch
A trunk pass-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest
to enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Items should not weigh more than 33 lbs. (15 kg) nor be more than
2 yards (2 metres) in length. See the label on the hatch.
1 Fold down the armrest.
2 Raise the hatch by lifting the handle.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off
suddenly if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into
gear.
WARNING
• Anchor the load securely (e.g. using middle safety belt) to
avoid danger of injury resulting from displacement of load on
hard braking.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 270).
Tie Downs
The tie downs for securing the load are fitted inside the trunk. Place
the load as far in as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
Interior equipment and trunk
Safety belt located
in its belt clip
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon
Both the narrow and wide sections of the rear seat can be folded
separately. Folding is facilitated if the front seats are not located too
far back. The wide section cannot be folded separately if a cargo net
is mounted on the rear of the backrest.
NOTICE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the backrest to prevent them from
being pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For
height adjustment refer to page 16.
2 Put the safety belts for the outer seat places in their respective
belt clips, which are located near the backrest (see illustration).
3 Raise the rear seatcushions by pulling theloop locatedbetween
the cushion and the backrest.
Alternative location of the parcel shelf if this is removed:
• Folded up on the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment.
• On edge behind the backrests of the front seats.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle on the right-hand side.
5 Fold the wide section of the backrest forward in the
corresponding manner.
6 Adjust the front seats for optimal driving/passenger comfort.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 139
WARNING
• Do not travel in the back seat without ensuring that the head
restraint is set at a suitable height for the seats to be occupied.
• Never allow anyone to sit on a folded backrest.
• Always be aware of the risk of pinching when handling moving
parts of the seating.
• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always
a danger of loose objects flying about and causing injury if the
car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.
• Make sure that the backrests are locked when they are folded
back upright. Check that the two red warning-indication flags
are fully down. This indicates that the backrests are locked.
Folding the narrow section of the backrest
The folding is facilitated if the front seat is not too far back.
• Check that the safety belt lock is not trapped under the seat
cushions when these are raised back up.
• If the car is equipped with a pull-out cargo net on the rear of the
backrest, take extra care when folding the rear seat so that no
one is injured by the net’s storage cassette on the right-hand
side.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For
height adjustment refer to page 16.
2 Put the safety belt in the belt clip near the backrest.
3 Raise therearseatcushionby pullingthelooplocatedatthe rear
of the cushion.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle.
5 Adjust the front seat for optimal passenger comfort.
NOTICE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the back rest to prevent them being
pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position, see
illustration page 138.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
Interior equipment and trunk
Load anchoring
• Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the load straps.
WARNING
WARNING
• Never use the elastic floor net and
elastic side net when the rear seat is
folded down. These nets are only
intended to keep light objects tidy, not
for the anchoring of loads.
• Match the speed and driving style
according to how the car is loaded.
The driving characteristics of the car
can be affected because the center of
gravity is alteredwhenthereis acargo
in the luggage compartment.
• Put heavy loads as low down and as
far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment, i.e. against the back of
the rear seat.
• If possible, avoid having the rear seat
folded down when driving with a heavy
load because the anchoring possibili-
ties arerestrictedwhenthe rear seat is
in this position. That the rear seat is
in the upright position is a basic
requirement for protection against
cargo displacement in the event of
a crash.
• Never overload the cargo net. If the
elasticbreaksthismaycausepersonal
injury. Do not use a cargo net that
shows signs of wear.
• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg) cor-
responds to a weight of 2200 lbs.
(1000 kg) in a head on crash at
32 mph (50 km/h).
• Neverstackcargosohighthatanypart
of the cargo lies above the edge of the
backrest, if a cargo guard (accessory)
is not being used.
• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and
luggage) so that the gross vehicle
weight or the axle weight is not
exceeded, see page 270.
• Cargo can intrude into the passenger
compartment during a sudden stop or
front crash if the outer safety belts are
not fastened. Check that the two red
warning-indication flags are fully
down. This shows that the backrests
are locked.
• Always tie down the cargo so that it
cannot be thrown forward during
heavy braking or in the event of a
crash.
Driving with the trunk lid/tailgate open, see
page 188.
• Unsecured and heavy cargo can
increase the risk of injury during hard
braking, sudden avoidance maneu-
vers and in the event of a crash.
• For the best load anchoring, use the
special cargo bolts and load straps
(accessory).
• Load the cargo bolts evenly. Never
attach more than one strap to each tie
down eye.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 141
Cargo bolts mounted on the longitudinal
rails
Example of cargo anchoring
Items for load anchoring:
Elastic cargo net for lighter objects.
On the floor of the luggage compartment
there are two longitudinal aluminium rails
(CargoTracks™) where special cargo bolts
can be mounted.
The cargo bolts are mounted by lifting their
locks and inserting them into the rail. Each
cargobolt is movedinthefollowingway: pull
up its lock and at the same time move it for-
ward or backward to the desired position.
The side netting should be attached to the
two tie down eyes which are included in the
accessory kit and to two of the eyes
mounted on the right-hand CargoTrack™
on the floor.
Thecargobolts, loadstraps andelastic nets
are stored in the two floor lockers on the
right- and left-hand side of the luggage com-
partment. The lockers are opened by lifting
the respective fabric loop.
• Cargo bolts (accessory).
• Special load straps (accessory).
Items to keep light objects tidy (accesso-
ries):
• Elastic floor cargo net.
• Elastic side cargo net for the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment.
The elastic nets may only be used to keep
light objects tidy, not for anchoring.
The floor net should be attached to the
cargo bolts that are mounted on the Car-
goTracks™. Place the tie down eyes as far
forward and as far back as possible on the
CargoTracks™.
NOTICE
Do not place any objects so that the
demisting and antenna elements on the
inside of the window could be damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
Interior equipment and trunk
WARNING
• The cargo in the luggage compart-
ment must be anchored properly,
even if the cargo net is correctly in
position. The only purpose of thenet is
to prevent light objects from being
thrownaboutinthecabinduringheavy
braking or in the event of a crash.
• Take extra care when tipping the wide
section of the rear seat forwards if the
car has a pull-out cargo net on the rear
of the backrest. Makesure that no one
is injured by the cargo net’s storage
cassette on the right-hand side where
the backrest is already folded.
Cover over the fixing point for the cargo
net
Attaching the cargo net to the roof
Hooks on the net’s storage cassette
Cargo net (accessory)
The pull-out cargo net’s storage cassette is
mounted on the rear of the backrest.
The pull-out cargo net can also be used
when the whole rear seat is folded. There
are two front attachment points in the roof
for this purpose.
Removing the cargo net storage cas-
sette
1 Remove the covers near the two rear
fixingpointsintheroof. Carefullybendin
the lower edge of the cover with a screw-
driver.
2 Pull the cargo net out directly back-
wards.
1 Fold down the entire rear seat (see
page 138).
2 Push the cassette to the right.
3 Snap the net’s twofasteners into the two
fixing points on the roof.
4 Make sure that the hooks on the net’s
own storage cassette fit against the net
mesh.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 143
Sliding floor (accessory)
WARNING
To avoid personal injury take note of the
following:
• Do not leave children unsupervised
when the sliding floor is drawn out.
• Be aware of the risk of pinching when
handling the sliding floor.
• Never drive the car with the sliding
floor pulled out.
Setting up the sliding floor
• Always use the car’s regular cargo
anchoring when transporting a cargo.
Thefunctionoftheslidingflooris tofacilitate
loading and unloading.
Securing loads, see page 137.
When the car is parked and the floor is
pulled out, it can bear the weight of two
people (maximum 440 lbs./200 kg).
Setting up
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold out the support wheels.
3 Set the floor down on the support
wheels.
• Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the anchoring
straps.
• The sliding floor must not be changed
or modified in any way.
• Puttheslidingfloorinthefolded-down
position when it is not in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
Interior equipment and trunk
Loading
Folding down the sliding floor
Trunk Release Handle
Loading/Unloading
When the floor is not in use
Trunk Release Handle
1 Lift the handle and pull out the sliding
floor to the outer locking position. Make
sure that the floor is locked correctly.
2 Put on the cargo, but make sure that it
does not cover the handle.
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold down the support wheels.
3 Laydowntheslidingfloorandmakesure
that it is locked in its lower position.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from the inside.
3 Lift the handle and push in the floor to
the inner locking position. Make sure
that the floor is locked correctly.
NOTICE
4 Tie down the load with Saab’s load
straps according to the instructions, see
page 140.
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as a an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment and trunk 145
Stowage of spare wheel and tools under
trunk floor
Jack location, between spare wheel and
sill
Spare wheel and tools
WARNING
The spare wheel, together with the jack and
jack handle, front towrope attachment eye
and toolkit, are stowed away underneath
the trunk. There is also room for a spare
bulb kit (accessory).
Stow all tools carefully away after use, so
that they cannot get loose and cause
injury in the event of a crash.
Driving considerations with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted, see page 187.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
Interior equipment and trunk
Button for releasing filler door
To open fuel filler door in an emergency
9-5 Sedan
To open filler door in an emergency,
9-5 Wagon
9-5 Wagon:
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page 229).
On the right-hand side of the luggage com-
partment, inthestoragelocker, is athinwire
that is tied to the locking arm of the filler
door. To open the door pull the yellow plas-
tic arrow attached to the end of the wire.
Fuel filler door
Opening the fuel filler
door in an emergency
(certain variants only)
The fuel filler door is opened by means of a
button on the driver’s door. The door is
spring-loaded, so it opens slightly automat-
ically when released.
(certain variants only)
If the fuel filler door fails to open after the
button on the driver’s door has been
pressed, it can be opened manually from
inside the trunk.
Refueling, see page 154.
9-5 Sedan:
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page 229).
A thin cable on the right-hand side in the
trunk is connected to the catch for the filler
door. To open the door, pull the yellow plas-
tic arrow on the end of the cable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 147
Economical motoring __
Driving in cold weather_
Driving in hot weather _
Towing a trailer _______
174
176
177
178
Ignition switch ________ 148
Starting the engine ____ 149
Towing the car________
Jump starting ________
188
188
188
191
Important considerations
for driving___________ 151
Driving with a roof rack
load________________
Refueling ____________ 154
Engine Break-In Period_ 157
Gear changing ________ 158
Cruise control ________ 167
Braking ______________ 168
183
185
185
Saab Parking Assistance 194
Driving at night _______
Driving with a load ____
Parking brake ________
Parking______________
196
196
Driving considerations
with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted ______
Traction Control System
Electronic Stability
171
187
Program (ESP) _______ 172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
Starting and driving
F
LOCK position
Engage reverse and turn the key to LOCK.
Automatic transmission: select ”P”.
The gear lever is locked. This is the only position in which the key can be
removed.
The parking lights, hazard warning lights and interior lighting all work.
F
F
OFF position
Gear lever no longer locked.
Certain electrical circuits operational
ON position
Ignition switch
All electrical circuits working. Do not leave the key in the ON position
when the engine is not running. Turn the key to OFF to switch off the
electrical circuits. In the ON position certain warning and indicator lights
come on as a check, and they normally are extinguished after about
3 seconds.
The combined ignition switch and
gear-lever lock is located in the center con-
sole between the front seats. The ignition
key can only be removed when reverse is
engaged (automatic transmission: selector
in ”P” position).
ST (starter) position
The key fits all the locks on the car. The key
number is specified on the small plastic
strap that comes with the keys when the car
is delivered. Keep a note of the key number
in a safe place, as you will need to quote it if
ordering a replacement key.
The starter operates when the key is turned to this position. When
released, the key will spring back to the ON position. If the engine fails to
start, the key must first be turned back to the position between OFF and
LOCK before the starter can be operated again.
When the starter motor is running, several electrical circuits are
disconnected to facilitate starting.
See also page 40.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 149
If the car does not start
Starting the engine
If the text ”Key not accepted. Contact ser-
vice.”isshownontheSID,afterafailedstart
attempt, the cause could be a fault in the
transmitter in the key, or in the receiver in
the ignition lock. The following should be
done:
NOTICE
WARNING
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
liquid gets into it, the switch may not
operate properly.
• When starting the engine:
- Sit down in the driver’s seat.
• Turn the key back to the LOCK position.
• Turn the key to ON.
• Press one of the buttons on the remote
control (the LED stops blinking).
• Start the engine.
Try another key. If this works, then the fault
is in the first key.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for
checking and rectification.
Note:
- Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the
gear lever is not in the neutral posi-
tion, the clutch pedal must be fully
depressed or the car will jump for-
wards or backwards, which may
cause a crash.
WARNING
• Always remove the key before leaving
the car.
• Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakebefore
removing the ignition key.
- Never start the car from outside the
vehicle, e.g. through a wound down
window. This could lead to serious
personal injury.
Certain electronic items, such as cellular
phones, may affect the starting produce-
dure. Besurethatalldevicesareclearofthe
key/ignition switch area.
• Engage reverse (R) (position P for
automatictransmission)toremovethe
ignition key. The key can only be
removed in this gear position.
• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
• There is also a danger of CO poison-
ing if the exhaust system is leaking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
Starting and driving
Cars with automatic transmission
Starting the engine
• The tail pipe of the exhaust system
can become very hot during driving.
Bear this in mind when loading and
unloading the car.
Avoid racing the engine or putting a heavy
load on it before it has warmed up. Drive
away as soon as the oil warning light has
been extinguished to enable the engine to
attain its normal temperature as quickly as
possible.
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
3 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
startedandisrunningsmoothly–atvery
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait
20–30 seconds before running the
starter again, to give the battery time to
recover.
• Do not rest or sleep in the car when
parked with the engine running. There
is a risk of depressing the accelerator
which could lead to engine damage.
The engine has an automatic choke and
should be started as follows:
Cars with manual transmission
To start theenginetheclutch pedalmust
be fully depressed.
It is possible for air to enter the lubricating
system in conjunction with an oil or oil-filter
change, or if the car has been stored for
some time. This air can cause the hydraulic
cam followers to emit a ticking noise, which
can persist for up to 15 minutes after start-
ing. Although this is quite normal and does
not indicate any malfunction, it is advisable
not to exceed 3,000 rpm before the noise
has disappeared.
The hydraulic cam lifters are completely
service free; the valve clearance is set up at
the factory and will not need any subse-
quent adjustment.
Lettheengineidleforabout10 seconds. Do
not open the throttle wide for at least
2–3 minutes after starting.
1 Depress the clutch pedal fully but do not
touch the accelerator.
2 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
startedandisrunningsmoothly–atvery
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait
20–30 seconds before running the
starter again, to give the battery time to
recover.
Useful tips on cold climate starting
If the engine has failed to start after several
attempts in very cold weather, press and
hold the accelerator down to the floor and
run the starter for 5–10 seconds. This will
prevent the engine being flooded (exces-
sively rich fuel-air mixture).
Now start the engine in the normal way – do
not touch the accelerator.
Iftheenginestallsimmediatelyafterstarting
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
donottouchtheacceleratorwhenrestarting
the engine.
Note:
On cars with manual transmission, if the
starter fails to engage when the ignition key
is turned to the start position, make sure the
clutch pedal is full depressed. Misposi-
tioned floor mats or other obstructions
under the clutch pedal may affect starting.
Lettheengineidleforabout10 seconds.Do
not open the throttle wide for at least 2–
3 minutes after starting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 151
Limp-home mode
Important
The engine management system has a
diagnostic feature that continually checks a
numberofinternalfunctions. If,forexample,
a fault is detected in the throttle valve, the
engine management system will go into
Limp-home mode.This limits idling control,
disables the cruise-control system and
limits the capacity of the A/C compressor.
NOTICE
considerations for
driving
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light
starts to flash, ease off the accelerator
slightly. If the light does not cease to flash
within 5 seconds, stop the car in a suit-
able place as soon as possible and turn
off the engine. The car must be towed to
an authorized Saab dealer.
The engine-management system in the
Saab 9-5 is called Saab Trionic T7. The
system manages the ignition, fuel injection
and turbo boost pressure.
The Trionic T7 system developed by Saab
is an intelligent engine-management
system designed to achieve optimum driv-
ability under differing driving conditions.
The system makes adjustments automati-
cally, for instance, if the car is being driven
at altitude (oxygen-deficient air), for differ-
ent grades of fuel (AON 87–93) and for dif-
ferent load conditions.
If the limp-home mode is in operation
(”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
light on, see below) and the outside temper-
ature is close to or below freezing, you may
need to use some throttle on starting (some
pressure on the accelerator).
If the diagnostic system has detected a fault
in the engine-management system, the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light
flashes, it indicates that the engine is mis-
firing which can result in damage to the
catalytic converter.
1 Starting and driving
light
on the main instrument panel will
come on (see page 57), indicating that you
should have the car checked as soon as
possible by an authorized Saab dealer.
• Refrain from using full throttle before
the engine has warmed up (before
needle in mid-range on temperature
gauge).
• A safety function prevents the engine
from revving faster than 6,000 rpm by
limiting the induction air.
2 Stopping the engine
• Do not rev the engine immediately
before switching it off – stop the engine
when it is idling.
3 Regulating the boost pressure
• The system is optimizedfor fuel with an
octanerating ofAON 90. The 2.3 Turbo
and 2.3 T are optimized for AON 93.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
Starting and driving
One of the advantages of the system is
that it enables the engine to be run
safelyonlower-gradefuel,althoughnot
lower than AON 87.
• The maximum boost pressure is
adjusted automatically to the knocking
or pinging tendency of the engine.
Occasional, short-lived knocking when
the engine is under a heavy load is per-
fectly normal; the extent will depend on
the grade of fuel in the tank.
• Isolated instances of knocking are
more likely to occur with low-octane
fuel. This controlled form of knocking,
followed by a reduction in the boost
pressure, isasignthatthe wastegate is
functioning and is perfectly safe for the
engine.
Important considerations with cata-
lytic converters
WARNING
If the engine is being run with the car on a
rolling road or dynamometer, longer than
for a standard state emission inspection,
to ensure adequate cooling, air must be
blown into the engine compartment and
under the car at a rate equivalent to the
ram-air effect that would be obtained at
the corresponding road speed.
NOTICE
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded gas-
oline is detrimental to the catalyst and
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the function of the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter is an emission-con-
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
system. It consists of a metal canister with a
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
walls coated in a catalytic layer (mixture of
precious metals).
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-
tinuestofunctionproperly, andalsotoavoid
damage to the converter and its associated
components, the following points must be
observed:
NOTICE
• If the engine sounds strange there is a
fault in the system. Have the car
checked without delay by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
• Have the car serviced regularly in accor-
dance with the service program. The fuel
and ignition systems are particularly
important in this context.
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine dam-
age.
• Always be alert to any misfiring of the
engine (not running on all cylinders) and
any loss of power or performance. At the
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
and take the car to an authorized Saab
dealer as soon as possible.
• If the engine fails to start (in very cold
weatherorifthebatteryisflat),thecarcan
be push started (manual gearbox only) or
started using jumper cables to a donor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 153
• Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic con-
verter gets very hot and could therefore
start a fire.
1
2
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
• If you jump start the car when the engine
is already up to normal temperature, the
engine must start to run on all cylinders.
Stop jump-starting if the engine fails to
start immediately.
3
3
2
NOTICE
Button for releasing filler flap
If the car runs out of fuel, it is possible for
air to get into the fuel system. If this
happens, the catalytic converter may
overheat and be damaged.
Oxygen-sensor-controlled
injection system
1 Engine control module
2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)
3 Catalytic converters
Fuel filler flap
(certain variants only)
The fuel filler flap is opened by means of a
button on the driver’s door. The flap is
spring-loaded, so it opens slightly automat-
ically when released.
Failure to follow these directions could
result in the catalytic converter and associ-
ated components being damaged, and
could represent a breach of the warranty
conditions.
battery. However, as soon as you have
started the engine, it is important that it
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
it to idle for up to five minutes to give it time
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
time, the engine still fails to run properly,
turn off the engine and get in touch with
an authorized Saab dealer for advice.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
Starting and driving
Only fuel from well-known oil companies
should be used.
All Saab gasoline engines can be driven on
fuel of grade AON 87–93.
For optimum performance we recommend:
• AON 90 for 2.3t
NOTICE
• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
right up the filler pipe as expansion
room is needed.
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine dam-
age.
• AON 93 for 2.3Turbo and 2.3T, (see page
272).
If fuel containing a mixture of alcohol is
used, the following restrictions apply:
Methanol: max. 5 % by volume.
Ethanol: max. 10 % by volume.
MTBE: max. 15 % by volume.
Fuel-tank capacity: 18.5 US gal. (70 liters)
Screwonthefillercapandkeepturninguntil
it has clicked at least three times.
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank well filled.
Beforetheonsetoffreezingtemperaturesin
winter, it may be advisable to add gasoline
anti-freeze to the fuel a few times to dispel
any condensation in the system.
The fuel filler cap is located in the right rear
quarter panel.
Refueling:
Refueling
WARNING
1 Switch off engine.
2 Open fuel door
3 Insert the fuel-pump nozzle beyond the
flange on the filler pipe. Do not withdraw
the nozzle while fueling is in progress.
• Never use fuel for any purpose other
than as engine fuel.
• Fuel is highly flammable and can
cause severe burns. Never use an
exposed flame in the vicinity of gaso-
line. Never smoke when filling the
vehicle up with fuel.
4 Stop refueling the first time the pump
turns off, indicating the tank is full.
• Do not use the phone when refueling.
Gasoline fuels are highly explosive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 155
blending percentages are met by such
fuels:
Recommended fuel:
The engine in your Saab 9-5 is designed to
operate on unleaded gasoline that has an
octane rating of 87 or higher. Octane rating
is determined according to the formula:
NOTICE
• Up to 10 % ethanol by volume, with corro-
sion inhibitors.
• Up to 15 % MTBE by volume (methyl ter-
tiary butyl ether).
• Up to 5 % methanol by volume, with an
equal amountofasuitable co-solvent and
added corrosion inhibitors.
Other, less common, fuel additives used by
some gasoline dealers are also acceptable,
provided that the resultant gasoline is not
more than 2.7 % oxygen by weight.
SomeCanadianandU.S. gasolinescontain
an octane enhancing additive called meth-
lycyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuel is used, your emission
control system performance may deterio-
rate and the malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for service.
However, these blended gasolines are reg-
ulated and should never exceed these rec-
ommended blend percentages and service
station operators should know if their gaso-
lines contain detergents and oxygenates,
and have been reformulated to reduce vehi-
cle emissions. Nevertheless, if you begin to
noticeaproblemwiththewayyourcarstarts
or runs shortly after it has been refueled, try
a different brand of gasoline.
• Fill to maximum filling capacity
• Stop filling after the first time that the
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
MON + RON
2
• Filling capacity can differ between
different fuel stations and outside
temperature. Fueltankvolumewhen
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
0.5 gal. (2 liters).
where MON is the Motor Octane Number,
and RON is the Research Octane Number.
The average of these two values is the
octane rating of the gasoline as it appears
on the pump at a retail gas station. This
value is sometimes referred to as the
"Anti-Knock Index" (AKI) or the "Average
Octane Number" (AON).
• Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
roomfor expansionespeciallyduring
hot weather.
Openingthefuelfillerdoorinanemergency,
see page 146.
To avoid deposit formation on the fuel injec-
tors which can cause poor driveability, use
only quality gasolines that contain deter-
gents and corrosion inhibitors. Because
gasolines sold at retail gas stations vary in
their composition and quality, you should
switch to a different brand if you begin expe-
riencing driveability and/or hard starting
problems shortly after refueling your car. In
recent years, a variety of fuel additives and
alcohols or oxygenates have been blended
withgasoline.Thesetypesofgasolinesmay
befound inallpartsoftheUnitedStatesand
Canada, but particularly in geographic
areas and cities that have high carbon mon-
oxidelevels. Saabapproves theuseofsuch
"reformulated" gasolines in its products,
which help in reducing pollution from all
motor vehicles, provided that the following
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
Starting and driving
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87
octane or higher. Use of gasoline with an
octane rating lower than 87 can result in
severeenginedamage. Damagecausedby
incorrect fuel being used is not covered
under the terms of the New Car Warranty
and will be the responsibility of the owner. It
is recommended that the gasoline meet
specifications which were developed by the
American Automobile Manufacturers Asso-
ciation (AAMA) and endorsed by the Cana-
dian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Associa-
tion for better vehicle performance and
engine protection. Gasolines meeting the
AAMAspecificationcouldprovideimproved
driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasolines.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Higher concentrations of methanol than
listed above, or the use of methanol-
blended gasoline without suitable
co-solvents and corrosion inhibitors,
can damage your car’s fuel system,
leading to the need for repairs which are
not covered by Saab’s productwarranty.
The engine control module (ECM) mon-
itoring the engine parameters also
stores fault codes.
Under certain circumstances, this may
cause constant illumination of the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)” lamp
fault that must be checked by your Saab
dealer, see page 57.
, thus indicating a
NOTE:alwaysobservethefollowingtwo
measures:
• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
screwed on correctly before the
engine is started. Screw on the fuel
filler cap until you hear 3 distinct
clicks.
In Canada, look for the
”Auto Makers’ Choice” label
on the fuel pump.
• Avoid driving with the fuel low level
indicator illuminated. The symbol
illuminates when less than approxi-
mately 2 gallons (8 litres) of fuel
remains in the tank.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If
the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s
bad enough, it can damage your engine. If
you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service. But don’t worry if you
hear alittlepingingnoisewhen you’re accel-
erating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane
fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, con-
stant knock thatmeans you have a problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 157
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (indicated on the
underhood emission control label), it is
designed to operate on fuels that meet Cali-
fornia specifications. If such fuels are not
available in states adopting California emis-
sions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal spec-
ifications, but emission control system per-
formance may be affected. The ”Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)” indicator
on your main instrument panel may turn on
and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check
test. See ”Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)” indicator on page 57. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause
of failure. In the event it is determined that
the causeofthecondition is thetypeof fuels
used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an
Engine Break-In Period
Pistons, bores and bearings need time to
obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces.
octane-enhancing additive called methylcy-
clopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator
whether or not the fuel contains MMT. Saab
Automobile AB does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be
reduced and your emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunc-
tionindicator lamp onyourinstrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Saab dealer for service.
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-
ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), do
not exceed 5,000 rpm.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
throttle, other than for brief instances,
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).
Wearing in new brake pads
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
under stop-and-go conditions or about
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
hard braking as much as possible during
this period.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
Starting and driving
Gear changing
3
4
Manual transmission
1
2
5
Tostartthe engine the clutchpedal must
be fully depressed.
R
The gear positions are marked on the gear
lever. Before reverse (R) can be engaged,
you must lift the ring underneath the
gear-lever knob.
To change gear, fully depress the clutch
pedal and then release it smoothly. It is
inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the transmission.
When changing down from 5th to 4th gear,
ease the gear lever straight back, without
applying any lateral pressure. This will pre-
vent 2nd gear being engaged by mistake,
which can result in overreving and possible
damage to the engine.
Before engaging reverse, wait till the car is
at a standstill, release the accelerator and
fullydepresstheclutch. From neutral, press
the gear lever firmly to the right before
easing it back into reverse.
NOTICE
When the reverse gear is to be engaged
the car must be at a standstill with the
accelerator fully released. Lift thereverse
lock-out collar and push the gear lever
firmly to the right in neutral before easing
it into reverse.
Towing
Towing of cars with manual transmission,
see page 188.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 159
Automatic transmission
WARNING
• Make ita habitto keepyour foot onthe
brake when selecting a drive position,
to prevent the car from creeping for-
ward (or backward if reverse is
selected).
• The car must be at a standstill before
P,RorNisselected. Youhavetohave
your foot on the brake pedal to move
the lever out of P. If the car is still
moving when a drive position is subse-
quently selected, this could cause a
crash or damage the automatic trans-
mission.
Selector lever
Selector-lever indicator on main instru-
ment panel
The electronic control module for the auto-
matic transmission receives information on
engine torque and road speed, and also
controls the hydraulic pressure in the trans-
mission to ensure that gear changing is as
smooth as possible.
When the car is stationary, the engine must
be at idling speed when the selector lever is
moved.
You must have your foot on the brake
pedal to move the lever out of park.
• Never park the car with the selector
lever in a drive position, even if the
parking brake is on.
• If you want to leave the car with the
engine running, move the selector
lever to P or N and apply the parking
brake.
If the accelerator is depressed while the
lever is moved, this will result in abnormal
wear in the transmission.
The position of the selector lever is shown
by the symbols adjacent to the lever and
also by an indicator on the main instrument
panel. If manual mode (M) is selected, the
current gear is also displayed on the main
instrument panel.
NOTICE
The ignition key can only be removed when
the selector lever is in the P position.
After selecting a drive position, pause
brieflytoallow thegear toengage(thecar
starts to pull a little) before you acceler-
ate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
Starting and driving
Four modes for the automatic transmission
canbeselected:Normal,Manual, Sportand
Winter.
TheNormalmode, whichprovidesthebest
fuel economy, is the default setting when
the engine is started.
Lock-up function
The automatic transmission has a lock-up
function, which can render the torque con-
verter inoperative in 3rd, 4th and 5th gears,
thus reducing the engine speed and fuel
consumption.
When the lock-up function comes into oper-
ation, it may give the impression of an over-
drive being engaged.
Manual mode (Sentronic): see page 163.
When the Sport mode is selected, the
throttle angle is altered to provide more
power at the same throttle setting. The
transmission also changes up later than in
Normal mode to provide higher perfor-
mance. In this mode, the SPORT indicator
will appear on the main instrument panel
(see page 166).
The Winter mode is intended for use when
pulling away and driving onicy roads. In this
mode, thetransmissionstarts in3rdgear, to
provide better grip, and the WINTER indica-
tor appears on the main instrument panel.
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the auto-
matic transmission will automatically revert
to Normal mode (see page 166).
Kick-down
Whentheacceleratorispresseddownhard,
a change-down to the next gear will be
effected to provide maximum acceleration,
e.g. for overtaking.
Detent positions for selector movement
Following this, the next higher gear will be
selected at the optimum engine speed for
acceleration or, if you ease off the acceler-
ator, before reaching this.
The detent button on the selector lever has
to be pressed before the selector can be
moved between certain positions.
Adaptive gear-change pattern is a trans-
mission function in the Normal and Sport
modes which matches gear changing to
currentdrivingconditions.Thetransmission
control module senses the load on the
engine and temperature of the transmis-
sion. A suitable gear change pattern is then
selected automatically to avoid unneces-
sary gear changes and undesired tempera-
ture increases in the transmission.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 161
Shift Lock override
NOTICE
Automatic transmission,
fault indicator
If ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”
light appears on the main instrument panel,
the system has detected a fault in the auto-
matic transmission or its control module
(see page 59).
This also means that the Limp-home mode
has been selected, to guard against further
damage being done to the transmission. In
this mode, the automatic transmission
starts in 5th gear, and gear changes (if nec-
essary) will have to be made manually.
Stop the car in a safe place. Switch off then
restart the engine. If the fault is intermittent,
the transmission will operate as normal
despite the fault indicator being on. Have
the car checked at an authorized Saab
dealer.
It is not possible to select the SPORT,
WINTER or Sentronic mode when the
Limp-home mode is active.
Due to electrical problems it may not be
possible to move the selector out of the
park position, even if the ignition is ON. If
for some reason the selector has to be
moved out of the park position (i.e. to tow
the car a short distance) do as described
below.
Check fuse No. 1 (see page 229). If the
problem was cured by changing the fuse or
battery, you do not have to contact a Saab
dealer.
If the fuse blows again as soon as the Shift
Lockfeatureis activated youshould contact
your Saab dealer.
Park Brake Shift lock
The transmission has a security function
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
the gear selector out of the P position, the
brakepedalmust bedepressedat the same
time as the gear selector catch (detente) is
pressed in.
IfthefuseisOK, checkthebatteryregarding
the voltage.
1 Apply the parking brake
2 Make sure the key is in position ON
3 Use a small tool such as a screwdriver
and push the lever (see picture) down-
wards so that the detent button can be
pressed approx. 10 mm
Gear changes must be made manually.
The following gears will be engaged in the
respectiveselector positions when the auto-
matic transmission is in Limp-home mode:
4 Move the selector out of position P to N
5 Remove the tool
6 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately; otherwise keep
it applied
Position
Gear
R
D
M
L
Reverse 5th
5th
2nd
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
Starting and driving
Overheated transmission fluid
If the automatic-transmission fluid should
overheat,thefollowingmessagewillappear
on the SID:
”Gearbox too hot. Make a safe stop.”. In this
event, stop the car in a suitable place,
switch off the engine and open the hood.
Wait for several minutes then turn on the
ignitionto check that the messagehas gone
out. When driving subsequent to the trans-
mission fluid overheating, select a gear in
which the engine speed is about 3,000 rpm.
Overheating of the automatic-transmission
fluid can occur when the car is towing a
heavyload, suchas a camping trailer in hilly
country. High ambient temperatures can
also increase the temperature of the trans-
mission fluid or the oil cooler may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer (see
also page 178).
Driving on hilly roads with a heavy
load
NOTICE
The transmission fluid can overheat when
the gearbox is strained, for example, when
driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid
the transmission fluid overheating, always
drive in Normal mode. The adaptive gear
change patterns are then active.
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler
can also cause the transmission fluid to
overheat. Overheating reduces the service
life of the fluid. Contact an authorized Saab
dealer (see also page 178).
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 5th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish.
Select position L to prevent unnecessary
wear on the transmission. The transmis-
sion then starts in 2nd gear. Once the car
is moving you can select position D.
When the indicator light is on, the car
must not be driven with a caravan or
trailer attached.
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position D or L) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
Towing
Towingofcarswithautomatictransmission,
see page 188.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 163
Descending hills
Sentronic, manual mode
Move the selector lever to the M position.
Select a higher gear by flicking the
If the speed of the car increases while
descending a steep hill, despite the acceler-
ator being released, the control module will
change down a gear when you brake. If you
desire more powerful engine braking, man-
ually select a lower gear.
right-hand paddle
towards you. Select
a lower gear by flicking the left-hand paddle
towards you.
An example of when you may wish to make
manualgearchangesiswhenovertaking,to
enable you to remain in a low gear for an
extended period of time.
Changes from 3rd to 4th and from 4th to 5th
can be made when the engine speed is
above roughly 2,000 rpm.
If youselecta gearthat is judgedtoohighby
the system, the selected gear position will
be shown briefly on the main instrument
panel and then the gear that is actually
engaged.
Paddles on the steering wheel for
changing gear manually
When the selector lever is in the M position,
as opposed to the D position, gas engines
are much more responsive to changes in
accelerator position. The accelerator has a
different feel.
If the road surface is slippery, you may wish
to pull off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of
wheel spin.
When descending hills you should select a
lowgeartoincreasethebrakingeffectof the
engine and thus spare the brakes.
Manual gear selections are shown on the
main instrument panel. The selector posi-
tion and the current gear are displayed.
When in manual mode, kick-down operates
for 4th and 5th gears (below 2,000 rpm).
Kick-downcannotbeactivatedin1st,2ndor
3rd gears.
For optimum performance, gear changes
should be made before reaching 6,000 rpm.
To avoid damaging the engine and trans-
mission, thetransmissionwillshiftupa gear
iftheengineisindangerofoverrevving.You
may feel aslight jolt before this gear change
is effected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
Starting and driving
Selector positions
P
D
The Drive position (D) is the position for normal
motoring. Gear changes between 1st and 5th
will take place automatically, the timing of which
is determined by the throttle (accelerator) posi-
tion and the speed of the car.
To shift out of the P position you must
depress the brake pedal and the ignition
must be ON.
The parking position (P) must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
selector lever is locked and the transmission is
mechanically immobilized. Always apply the
parking brake after parking the car.
The engine can be started. The key can be
removed.
After moving the selector lever to D, pause to
give the gear time to engage (car starts to pull).
M
Move the selector lever from position D to M to
allow you to change gear manually. Refer to
page 163.
R
The reverse (R) position must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
detent-release button must be pressed before
the selector lever can be moved to R. Wait until
reverse gear has engaged (car starts to creep)
before touching the accelerator.
L
Select position L if you wish to drive in 1st gear.
No upchanges will be made if you pull off in posi-
tion L. If you move the selector lever from posi-
tion D or M to L at a high vehicle speed, the
transmission will automatically shift down
through 4th, 3rd and 2nd gears to 1st gear,
depending on the car’s speed. Use this position
for descending steep hills if the car is heavily
loaded to spare the brakes.
N
In the Neutral position (N), the transmission is
disengaged from the engine. The engine can be
started, but first ensure that the parking brake is
on, to prevent the car from moving off unexpect-
edly.
To prevent the engine and transmission from
becoming hotter than necessary, select N for
stops other than brief ones, e.g. if stuck in a traf-
fic jam.
The normal drive position (D) is recommended
for waiting at traffic lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 165
If you move the selector lever from D to L, downchanges will follow
a set pattern to avoid damaging the engine or transmission.
Manual gear-changing is not recommended on slippery roads.
If one of the drive wheels spins excessively, the engine torque will
be reduced to avoid damaging the transmission.
Adaptive gear-change patterns
Adaptive gear-change patterns are selected automatically depend-
ing on the engine load and the present temperature of the transmis-
sion. The function is available in Normal and Sport modes.
The changes occur at a higher engine speed and the car remains in
the same gear for longer, if the transmission control module senses
that the load has not decreased. These gear-change patterns pre-
vent unnecessary changing up and down, when for example driving
up or down long slopes with a trailer or caravan, and to prevent over-
heating the transmission oil. The adaptive gear-change function is
also selected automatically when the transmission oil becomes too
hot, to protect the transmission itself from damage and to lower the
oil temperature.
The adaptive gear-change pattern function is deselected when:
• Winter mode is selected.
• The engine is switched off.
• The load is reduced so much that the function is no longer
required.
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”
instrument panel, see page 161.
appears on main
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
Starting and driving
SPORT and WINTER modes
To select Sport mode, press the ”S” button on
The Winter mode facilitates pulling away and
driving on icy roads. Third gear is selected auto-
matically for pulling away to reduce wheelspin.
Winter mode can be selected when the engine
is running by pressing the ”W” button on the
selector-lever surround. It cannot be selected
when the selector lever is in position M or L.
Note: It is still possible to use kick-down in the
Winter mode, in which case a change-down to
1st or 2nd will take place.
the selector lever when the selector lever is in
position N or D.
In this mode, gear changes will take place at
higher engine speeds than in Normal mode, in
other words, the transmission will change up
later andchange downearlier for the same throt-
tle (accelerator) position.
The Sport mode will be deselected if:
The Winter mode will be deselected if:
• The S button is pressed.
• The selector lever is moved to position P,R, M
or L.
• The W button is pressed.
• The engine is switched off.
• The selector lever is moved to position M or L.
• The automatic-transmission fluid overheats.
• The engine is switched off.
• The Winter mode is selected.
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”
appears on main instrument panel, see page
161.
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”
appears on main instrument panel, see page
161.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 167
To cancel temporarily
Cruise control
Move the control stalk to CANCEL
(spring-loaded position before OFF posi-
tion). This will disengage the system but the
preset speed will be retained in the system
memory. (The memory is deleted when the
engine is switched off.)
WARNING
• Do not use the Cruise control system
on wet or icy roads, in dense traffic or
on winding roads.
To re-engage the system
To revert to the preset speed, slide the
switch to RESUME/–. This will only operate
when the car’s speed is above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
• Set the control to OFF when you do
not want to use the system, to prevent
the system being activated inadvert-
ently.
For safety reasons (brake system func-
tion) the brakes must be applied once,
when the engine has started, before the
cruise control system can be activated.
The system is operated by means of the
controls on the stalk switch:
Cruise-control switches
To set the desired speed
Move the switch to ON. Accelerate to the
desired speed (minimum speed: 25 mph
(40 km/h))and press SET/+.
• ON/OFF (switch on/off).
To increase the preset speed
Accelerate to the desired speed and press
SET/+.
You can also increase the speed of the car
using the SET/+ button. Press it once to
increase the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or
hold it in and release when the desired
speed is reached.
• RESUME/– (Resume preset speed).
• SET/+ (to set the desired speed).
• CANCEL (Cancel operation of system,
e.g. to reduce speed temporarily).
When the system is ON, the CRUISE indi-
cator light will appear on the main instru-
ment panel and will be extinguished when
the system is switched OFF. If CANCEL is
selected, CRUISE will flash once.
Temporary increase in speed
Press the accelerator to override the preset
speed, e.g. for overtaking.
When you release the accelerator, the
system will revert to the preset speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
Starting and driving
To reduce the preset speed
The cruise control system will always disen-
gage automatically the moment that either
the brake pedal or the clutch pedal is
depressed.
It is also possible to reduce the speed by
means of the RESUME/– button.
Sliding the button to RESUME/– once will
reduce the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Holding the button in the RESUME/– posi-
tion will effect a gradual reduction in speed
until the button is released.
Disengaging the system
Braking
The system will be disengaged:
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
(e.g. when negotiating long descents with a
drop of several hundred feet), select a low
gear to use the braking effect of the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, move
the selector lever to position D or L.
• When the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed.
• When the switch is moved to CANCEL.
• When the switch is moved to OFF.
• When the engine is switched off.
• When the selector lever is moved to posi-
tion N (cars with automatic transmission).
• When the TCS/ESP system is operative
for more than 1 minute.
When driving fast, you can help to prolong
the life of the brakes by thinking ahead and
braking harder for short periods, rather than
braking more moderately over long
stretches.
Brake pad wear indicators
The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 3 mm, the pad
will produce a screeching, squealing or
scrapingnoisewhenthebrakesareapplied.
New pads should be fitted without delay.
Brake pads should only be replaced by
an authorized Saab dealer.
To ensure optimum brake performance,
it is recommended that you use only
Saab original brake pads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 169
ABS (antilock braking system) modulates
the brake pressure to the respective
wheels. Wheel sensors detect if a wheel is
about to lock, and the control module
reduces the pressure to that wheel and then
increases it once more until the tendency is
detected again.
The brake system is equipped with an Elec-
tronic Brake-force Distribution device
(EBD), which distributes the brakepressure
between the front and rear wheels, in such
awayas to achieveoptimumbraking perfor-
mance irrespective of the car’s speed and
load.
ABS brakes
WARNING
WARNING
• It is prudent to try your brakes from
timetotime, especiallywhendrivingin
heavyrain, throughwatercollectedon
the road, in snow, on a wet road sur-
face or in salty slush. In such condi-
tions, thebrakes may take longer than
normal to take effect. To rectify this,
touch the brake pedal periodically to
dry the brakes out.
• The additional safety afforded by the
ABS system is not designed to allow
drivers to drive faster but to make
normal driving safer.
• Tostop asquickly as possible, without
loss of directional stability, whether
theroadsurfaceisdry,wetorslippery,
press the brake pedal down hard-
without letting up (do not pump the
pedal), declutching simulta-
• The same applies after the car has
been washed or when the weather is
very humid.
neously, and steerthecarto safety.
• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
Before parking, and if the traffic condi-
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that
thebrakediscsandpadswarmupand
dry.
• The brakes are power assisted and it
should be kept in mind that the servo
unit only provides the power assis-
tance when the engine is running.
• Thebrakepressurerequiredwhenthe
engine is off,(e.g. when the car is
being towed) is roughly four times the
normal pedal force required. The
pedal also feels hard and unrespon-
sive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
Starting and driving
The ABS system has a built-in diagnostic
function which will switch on the Anti-lock
brake warning light if a fault is detected in
the system (see page 56).
The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel or on snow or ice
but, because the wheels cannot lock up,
some steering control is retained.
When the ABS system is working, i.e. mod-
ulation of the brake pressure is in progress,
the brake pedal will pulsate and a ticking
noise will be heard. All this is perfectly nor-
mal.
Press the pedal down hard (you cannot
press too hard) and steer the car to safety.
Braking with ABS brakes.
Braking with ABS – evasive steering
When the system is operating, the brake
pedal will pulsate gently and the system
will make a ticking noise.
Donotreleasethebrakepedalbeforethe
car has come to a halt or the danger is
past!
That is critical.
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
operate even when only light pressure is
applied to the pedal. This means that you
can brake gently to test the condition of the
road and adapt your driving accordingly.
It is well worth practicing the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pad or other suitable facil-
ity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 171
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing with the front wheels on different sur-
faces (e.g. one slippery and one dry). The
TCS then functions like an electronic dif-
ferential lock.
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing on a slippery road, in which case the
TCS eliminates wheelspin. The same
applies when the car is reversing.
Traction Control System
How the system works
The traction control system (TCS) is
designed to prevent wheelspin. This
enables the car to achieve the best possible
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
together with greater stability.
The TCS system uses information from the
ABS system’s wheel sensors to detect
when the front (driving) wheels are rotating
faster then the rear wheels. It then monitors
whether one driving wheel is rotating faster
than the other. If so, the faster wheel is
retardeduntilbothwheelsarerotatingatthe
same speed.
• Oncornering, if thereis atendencyforthe
inner front wheel to rotate faster than the
other wheels.
• On overtaking.
TCS indicator
WARNING
The indicator light will come on for
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to
ON, while an internal system check is per-
formed.
If the two front wheels are rotating at the
same speed but are turning faster than the
rear wheels, the torque from the engine is
reduced to eliminate the difference.
To ensure that the system works as
designed, the dimensions of all four tires
must be the same.
When driving normally, TCS will help to
improve the stability of the car. This does
not mean that car can be driven faster.
Thesamecareandprudenceas normally
applied should be displayed on cornering
and when driving on slippery roads.
The
light in the tachometer comes on
when the system is operative, i.e. when the
wheels are not rotating at the same speed.
The fact that the TCS system is operative
indicates that the limit for grip has been
exceeded and that the driver must exert
greater care.
The process continues until all the wheels
are rotating at the same speed.
TheadvantagesoftheTCSsystembecome
most apparent when the cohesion between
the front wheels and the road surface is so
low that one or both of the wheels would
lose their grip were the car not equipped
with the TCS, e.g.:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
Starting and driving
TCS OFF
Turning the TCS off
The TCS is switched on automatically when
the engine is started.
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
The
indicator on the main instrument
panel will come on:
Thesystemcanbeswitchedoffmanuallyby
The Electronic Stability Program employs
both the antilock braking system (ABS) and
the traction control system (TCS). It is a
safety system that helps the driver to stabi-
lize the car in unusual circumstances that
can otherwise be difficult to handle.
• If a fault has been detected and the
system has therefore been switched off.
• If there is a fault in the ABS system.
• If the system has been switched off man-
ually.
The indicator light will also come on for
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to
ON, while an internal system check is per-
formed.
the TCS button, whereupon
on the
main instrument panel will come on. The
TCSsystemcannotbeswitchedoffifthecar
is travelling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).
It may benecessary toswitchoffthesystem
if the car has become bogged down, for
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
If a fault is detected in the ABS system, the
TCS will be switched off automatically.
Thecruise-controlsystemwillautomatically
bedisengagedafteronesecondifitisactive
when the TCS starts to operate.
How the ESP system works
TheElectronicStability Programcanhelpto
prevent the car from skidding by braking
one or several wheels independently of the
driver. The engine output is then also
reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
spinning. Thecarhassensorsthatmeasure
wheel speed, yaw acceleration, lateral
acceleration, steering wheel position and
braking pressure. The values provided by
these sensors are used to calculate the
actual direction of the car. If this direction
does not agree with that intended by the
driver, calculated from the steering wheel
position, the ESP is engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 173
ESP indicator light
The
indicator light in the tachometer
comesonfor ashortperiodoftimewhenthe
ESP system is operative.
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
cohesion between the tires and the road,
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver.
ESP OFF
The
if:
light in the rev counter comes on
• A fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off.
• The system has been switched off manu-
ally.
Turning ESP off
The system can be turned off manually with
the ESP button, whereupon the light
on the main instrument panel will come on.
The ESP system cannot be switched off if
the car is travelling faster than 35 mph
(60 km/h).
The ESP is always operative during brak-
ing, even if it has been switched off manu-
ally.
• When the ignition key is turned to the ON
position, the lamp is lit for about four sec-
onds while the system undergoes a
self-test.
Increased stability with ESP.
The system applies the brakes to the
wheels as shown to prevent the car from
skidding
ESP improves the driver’s chances of
retaining control over the car in critical situ-
ations.
WARNING
To ensure that the system works as
designed, the dimensions of all four tires
must be the same.
When driving normally, ESP will help to
improve the stability of the car. This does
not mean that car can be driven faster.
Thesamecareandprudenceasnormally
applied should be displayed on cornering
and when driving on slippery roads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
Starting and driving
Economical motoring
NOTICE
Factors affecting fuel consumption
Fuel consumption is greatly affected by the
general driving conditions, the way in which
the car is driven and at what speeds, the
weather, the state of the road, the condition
of the car, etc.
Suspension modifications, such as
changing the type of wheels, dampers or
springs, canaffectthefunctionoftheESP
system.
Always consult a Saab dealer before
changing any suspension components.
Breaking-in
Fuelconsumptionmaybesomewhathigher
during the break-in period (the first 3,000–
4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km) than stated.
Weather conditions
Fuel consumption can be as much as 10 %
lower in summer than in winter. The higher
consumptionincoldweatherisexplainedby
the longer time it takes for the engine to
reach normal operating temperature, and
for the transmission and wheel bearings to
warm up. Fuel economy is also affected by
the distance driven: short journeys of 3–
5 miles (5–8 km) do not give the engine
enough time to reach normal temperature.
Strong winds can also affect fuel consump-
tion.
Percentage increase in fuel consumption
of engine starting from cold compared to
engine at normal temperature.
How to read the graph above:
If fuel consumption with the engine at
normal temperature is 28 mpg
(10l/100 km), the actual fuel consumption 3
miles (5 km) after the engine has started
from cold will be:
– 23.5mpg(12l/100 km)atoutsidetemp.of
68°F (20°C) (increase of 20 %).
– 17.7mpg(16l/100 km)atoutsidetemp.of
32°F (0°C) (increase of 60 %).
– 14 mpg (20l/100 km)) at outside temp. of
–4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100 %).
As can be seen, both the distance travelled
bythecarandtheoutsidetemperaturehave
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 175
a major impact on fuel consumption after
theenginehasstartedfromcold. Thus,ifthe
car is mainly used for short journeys of
3–5 miles (5–8 km), the fuel consumption
will be 60–80 % higher than normal.
• Driving in a low gear results in higher fuel
consumption than in a high gear because
of the higher engine speed for a given
roadspeed. Alwayschangeuptoahigher
gear as soon as traffic conditions allow
and use the highest gear as much as pos-
sible.
Road conditions
Wetroadsincreasefuelconsumption, asdo
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).
Driving technique
• To obtain the best running economy, not
only regarding fuel consumption but gen-
eral wear also, regular service is required.
• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
heavybrakingandmuchlow gear workall
gives rise to higher fuel consumption.
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a trailer all
increase fuel consumption.
• Do not run the engine when the car is sta-
tionary.
If idling, it will take much longer before the
engine becomes hot. Engine wear is
greatest during this warming-up phase.
Therefore drive away as soon as possible
after the engine is started and avoid high
revving.
• Check the air pressure in the tires once a
month. Incorrect pressures increase tire
wear. It is better to have slightly higher
pressure than lower.
• Check fuel consumption regularly.
Increased consumption can indicate that
something is wrong and that the car
needs to be checked by an authorized
Saab dealer.
Practical trials on the roads have demon-
strated that substantial savings in fuel con-
sumption can be made if the above advice
is heeded.
WARNING
Never switch the engine off while driving
as the effect of the brakes and power
steering will be greatly reduced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
Starting and driving
• Check the anti-freeze in the engine cool-
ant, see page 207.
The car´s trip computer will warn you when
there is a risk of slippery conditions. For fur-
ther information on this function, see page
64.
Engine block heater (standard
equipment in Canada, accessory in
U.S.)
The following are just some of the benefits
to the car and the environment of using an
engine block heater:
Driving in cold weather
Before starting a journey in cold weather
you should check the following:
• That the wiper blades have not become
frozen to the windshield/glass.
The car is equipped with tires designed to
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
roads, although this has been achieved at
the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
and ice, we therefore recommend that
winter (snow) tires be fitted.
Winter (snow) tires, particularly studded
tires (where use is legally permitted), gener-
ally make driving safer on snow and ice.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of different
types of winter tires and snow chains.
Studded tires are not allowed in some
countries.
• Brush any snow away from the air intake
for the heater system (opening between
hood and windshield).
• It may be advisable to lubricate the
door-lock cylinder (use molybdenum
disulphide, MoS2) to prevent its freezing.
If the lock has frozen, take care not to
break the key (or use the remote control)
– heat it first or spray it with de-icer.
• Periodically during the winter, add gaso-
line anti-freeze to the fuel to dispel any
condensation in the fuel tank which could
freezeandcauseproblems in thesystem.
Keep the tank well filled to reduce the risk
of condensation forming.
• Lower fuel consumption.
• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
over short runs.
• Reduced wear on the engine.
• Inside of car warms up faster.
The engine heater is effective at outside
temperatures up to +15–20°C. The warmer
it is outside, the shorter the time the engine
heater needs to be connected. Longer than
1.5 hours is unnecessary.
If the car is equipped with a removable,
electrical cabin heater that is not in use, this
should be stored in the luggage compart-
ment.
If the car is parked outside in freezing
weather, fuel additives (gasoline
anti-freeze) will not do any good as it
cannot remove water that has already fro-
zen. Park the car in a warm place so that
any ice that may have built up melts, then
add gasoline anti-freeze when filling up
the tank. Condensation is caused by
changes in the outdoor temperature or by
the car being parked alternately in a
garage and outside.
• It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes andtires bein
good condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 177
If winter tires are fitted, the same type must
befittedonall wheels. YourSaab dealer will
bepleasedtoadviseyouonthebesttiresfor
your car.
Remember that tires age. It may therefore
be necessary to change them before they
reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually
lose their friction properties.
Tire chains
Driving in hot weather
• Always check the coolant level before
startingajourney. Thelevelshouldbejust
below the MAX mark.
• At the end of a journey, if the engine has
worked hard, allow it to idle for two or
three minutes before switching it off.
If you want to fit tire chains (where legally
permitted) they should only be fitted to the
tires recommended under ”Specifications”
(see page 278).
Consult your Saab dealer for details of
approved tire chains.
The best response if the car gets into a
front-wheel skid is to freewheel (manual
gearbox only), i.e. disengage the clutch (so
that the wheels are neither driven or
retarded by the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
up on the accelerator and steer carefully in
the desired direction.
WARNING
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone:
• Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h)
when tire chains are fitted.
1 Bring the car to a standstill but leave the
engine running. Do not remove the cap
on the expansion tank even if the tank is
empty. If the needle on the temperature
gaugecontinuestorisewhiletheengine
is idling, switch off the engine.
• Tire chains can reduce the directional
stability of the car.
• Tire chains must not be used on the
rear wheels.
In a rear-wheel skid, steer in the same direc-
tion that the rear of the car is moving.
NOTICE
• Check the links frequently for wear.
• Check that the chains do not contact
the wheel-arch liner at full lock.
• See section ”Specifications”, page
278, for information on allowable
wheel dimensions for the fitting of tire
chains.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
Starting and driving
2 Wait until the needle has dropped back
to indicate normal temperature (roughly
midway, in the white zone) before stop-
pingtheengine. If thecoolant needstop-
ping up, unscrew the cap on expansion
tank carefully.
Top up, as necessary, ideally with a
50/50mixtureofSaab-approvedcoolant
and water. If only water is available, use
that, but remember to have the coolant
mixture checked as soon as possible.
Trailer hitch attachment
Towing a trailer
Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a max-
imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs. (1588 kg),
see also page 271.
WARNING
• When towing a trailer, do not attempt
to negotiate a hill having a gradient in
excess of 15 %. The weight distribu-
tionoverthefrontwheels ofthecarwill
be insufficient to prevent wheelspin,
making further progress impossible.
Use only the electrical trailer hitch socket
provided in the trailer hitch kit.
Saab recommends:
• Use a Saab original hitch kit attachment
which is designed and tested by Saab.
• Consult your Saab dealer regarding the
appropriate hitch kit for your car.
• In addition, the parking brake may not
always be able to hold the car and
trailer securely, with the result that the
wheels can start to slide downhill.
WARNING
• Exercise care when opening the hood
if the engine is overheated. Never
remove the expansion tank cap com-
pletely when the engine is hot.
NOTICE
• Always apply the trailer’s handbrake
when unhitching it. There is otherwise
a risk of personal injury or damage to
the bumper should the trailer start to
roll.
Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch and
wiring, since other wiring methods can
cause expensive damage to the car’s
body and electrical system.
• The cooling system is pressurized -
hot coolant and vapor can escape.
These can cause injury to your eyes
and burns. Open the cap slowly to
release the pressure before
removing it.
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for
guidance on how to connect the trailer
hitch electrical system.
3 As soon as possible, have the cooling
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 179
Maximum recommended trailer weights
for different gradients
Recommendations for driving in hilly
terrain
The following time limits are based on the
capacity of the cooling system in warm
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (30°C).
Trailer weight
Maximum recommended trailer weights for
different gradients, with a view to comfort
and drivability for manual and automatic
cars, are shown on the drawing.
Make sure you are familiar with the law
regarding speed limits for towing, maxi-
mum trailer weights, trailer-braking
requirements, and also any special
driving-licence provisions
Gradient Maximum
of hill, % trailerweight, tion, minutes
lbs. (kg)
Maximum dura-
6–7
3300 (1500) unlimited
3300 (1500) 15 max
(see also page 271).
8–9
The specified trailer weights and gradients
assumethat thejourney startsat thehill and
therefore apply only to short periods.
10–15
1870 (850)
15 max
The following time limits are based on the
capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (40°C).
Gradient Maximum
Maximum dura-
of hill, % trailerweight, tion, minutes
lbs. (kg)
6–7
2000 (900)
2000 (900)
1000 (450)
unlimited
15 max
8–9
10–15
15 max.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
Starting and driving
When negotiating long hills, bear the follow-
ing important considerations in mind:
Use Normal mode when driving with a cara-
van or trailer on hilly roads. The adaptive
gear change pattern function will prevent
the transmission overheating.
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperaturegaugeinthemaininstru-
ment panel.
Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
bythetemperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
When continuing your journey, select
manual mode and a gear in which the
engine speed is about 3,000 rpm until the
incline eases (see page 164).
Thefollowingstepsaretakeninorderasthe
temperature of the engine increases:
VARNING
Remembertousethebrakingeffectofthe
engine (position D or L) when you are
descending long or steep hills to spare
the brakes.
• Gear change pattern is altered.
• A/C compressor is switched off.
• Engine torque is reduced.
The following message will be displayed on
the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
too hot: “Gearbox too hot. Make a safe stop.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
Do not drive continuously with the WINTER
mode selected in hilly country when you are
towing a caravan, as this will increase fuel
consumptionandrisk overheating the trans-
mission.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 181
Recommendations for cars with manual
gearbox
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperaturegaugeinthemaininstru-
ment panel.
Driving considerations
Checks before driving
Always take extra care when towing a
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
and its braking effect reduced. The trailer’s
braking system and suspensionalsohavea
considerable effect on these characteris-
tics,seealso”Drivingwithaload”page 185.
Makesurethatthecarandcaravanortrailer
are in good working order. This is essential
since towing a caravan increases the strain
on the car.
Thefollowingstepsaretakeninorder as the
temperature of the engine increases:
• Check and if necessary adjust the tire
pressure of the car and caravan.
• Make sure all wheel bolts are properly
tightened.
• Make sure that the equipment joining the
car and caravan is properly secured and
adjusted.
Ifthecarhasautomatic transmission, select
position D when ascending steep hills. This
ensures that the adaptive gear change pat-
terns are operational, see page 165. Use
position D or L for steep descents.
• A/C compressor is switched off.
• engine torque is reduced.
Whencontinuingyourjourney,selectagear
in which the engine speed is about
3,000 rpm until the incline eases.
• Make sure the caravan’s electrical cable
is properly connected and is not so long
that it drags along the ground. Also, make
sure the cable is not too short and risks
breaking when turning a corner.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check the car and caravan brakes.
• Make sure that all items on or in the cara-
van or trailer are properly secured.
• Make sure that the caravan’s jockey
wheel is raised and locked.
NOTICE
VARNING
If the ”Automatic transmission, fault indi-
cator” indicator
towing until the problem has been recti-
fied.
comes on, cease
Utilize the braking effect of the engine
(1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you are
descending long or steep hills to spare
the brakes.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
• Check the distribution of the load so that
the car and caravan are well balanced.
• Check that the rearview mirrors provide
the best possible rearward vision.
• Make sure the caravan’s safety cable is
correctly attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
Starting and driving
Trailer hitch load
The weight distribution on the trailer makes
a lot of difference to the handling properties
of the car and trailer combination. As
regards single-axle trailers, whenever pos-
sible, concentrate the load over the wheels
and keep it as low as possible.
The trailer should be loaded so that the
maximum load on the towbar ball is 5 % to
7 % of the trailer weight with a maximum
permissible tongue weight of 110–165 lbs.
(50–75 kg).
Notethatthisloadmustbeaddedtothetotal
load for the car. If this now exceeds the
specified load capacity, the load in the lug-
gage compartment will have to be reduced
by a corresponding amount.
Distribution of load in trailer
a Light
b Moderate
Attach the safety chains to the holes as
illustrated.
c Heavy
WARNING
When you connect the trailer be sure to
attach its safety chains to the holes as
illustrated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 183
Driving with a roof rack
load
WARNING
• A roof load will affect the car’s center
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
aware of this when cornering and driv-
ing in crosswinds.
• Suit your speed to the prevailing con-
ditions.
• Due to higher aerodynamic drag, fuel
economymaysufferwhendrivingwith
a roof rack.
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)
9-5 Sedan
The carrier feet are marked with a top view
of the car and arrow indicating their posi-
tions.
3 Start on the left-hand side of the car.
Restthecarriercarefullyacrosstheroof,
with the rigid foot towards you. Hold the
foot clear of the roof to avoid damaging
the paintwork.
The maximum permissible roof load is
220 lbs. (100 kg).
Fold back the rubber strip and insert the
pins on the foot into the fixing holes.
Make sure that the rubber strip comes
inside the plastic cover on the carrier.
Repeat the procedure with theother car-
rier.
Note that the roof load is included in the
car’s maximum permissible load (see page
270).
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for the car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure the roof load
safely.
1 Sliptheplastic coveronto theadjustable
foot ofthecarrier (footwithknobfortight-
ening) to protect the paintwork during
assembly.
2 Open all the doors.
Fold back the rubber strip and find the
fixing holes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
Starting and driving
4 Close the doors on the left-hand side of
the car gently, to hold the carrier feet in
place.
5 Now go around to the other side of the
car and remove the plastic cover from
the carrier’s adjustable foot. Fold back
the rubber strip and insert the pins on
the foot into the fixing holes. Do the
samewiththeother carrierandclosethe
doors gently.
6 Tighten each carrier by turning the knob
clockwise (by hand). Tighten just
enough to bring the foot up against the
edges of the fixing holes.
Remove the carriers when not in use, as
they increase fuel consumption.
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)
9-5 Wagon
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
2 Check the markings on the cross mem-
bers to see which is the front and which
is the rear roof carrier.
3 Place the cross members on the roof
rails, on their respective sides of the
center supports. The cross members
must not be placed beyond the front or
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the dis-
tance between the cross members is at
least 28 inches (700 mm).
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross
members must be positioned so that the
tailgate can be opened fully without hit-
ting the roof box.
The instructions that accompany the carri-
ers also include adviceondrivingwitha roof
load – we strongly recommend that you
read them carefully.
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket so
that it lies snugly against the outside of
the roof rail. Make sure that the roof car-
riers are seated centrally on the rubber
spacers and that these sit correctly on
the roof rail. Pull the spacers down
slightly on the inside of the roof rail.
5 Center the roof carriers so that they pro-
trude equally on both sides.
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.
Ensure that the tightening knobs are
upright once the roof carriers have been
tightened.
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely
in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 185
Driving at night
Driving with a load
Bear in mind the following points when
driving at night:
The driving characteristics of the car are
affected by the way it is loaded.
• Nighttime driving requires your full con-
centration.
• Place heavy loads as far forward and as
low as possible in the trunk.
• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
slightly longer.
• Secure the load to the tie downs, see
page 137.
• Thenumberofdriversundertheinfluence
ofdrugsislikelytobegreateratnightthan
during the day.
• The load should be such that the car´s
total weight or axle weight are not
exceeded, see page 270.
• Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-
ing vehicles.
• Avoid driving at night if you have poor eye-
sight. Night vision deteriorates with age.
• Keep your car's headlights, windows and
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
make sure they are clean.
• Make sure you are well rested before
startingalongjourney.Takeabreakevery
other hour.
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s center of
gravity is further back. As a result, the car
will sway more during evasive steering.
• Never exceed the permissible load in the
roof box, even if there is room for more.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct –
slight overinflation is preferable to under-
inflation.
• The braking distance of a loaded car is
always greater. Keep your distance from
the vehicle in front.
• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
tendency to induce tiredness.
• Roof loads can negatively affect tele-
communication.
Tire pressure, see page 280 and back
cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
Starting and driving
The tire pressure should match the current
load and speed of the car; see page 279 or
the tire pressure label on page 280.
The tire pressures given apply to cold tires,
that is tires that are the same temperature
as the outside air temperature.
The tire pressure increases as the tires
become warm (e.g. during highway driving)
with approximately 0.3 bar (4 psi). When
the temperature of the tires changes by 50°
(10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar
(2 psi).
Neverreducethepressureofahottire. Ifthe
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Underinflated tires wear more quickly than
slightly overinflated tires.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
a new one.
Important! Remember to adjust the tire
pressures if you change the load in the car
or intend to drive at substantially lower or
higher speeds than normal.
Tires
WARNING
Check the tire pressure at least once a
month and before long journeys. Under-
inflation can result in:
• Punctures
• Separation of the tire and tread
• Damage to the sidewalls
• Damage to the rims on poor roads
• Poor handling characteristics
• Premature tire wear
• Increased fuel consumption.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 187
The following should be observed when the
compact spare wheel (T115/70 R16) is
fitted:
Driving considerations
with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted
• The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the wheel.
• Do not drive further than necessary with
the compact spare fitted – the maximum
life of the wheel is only just over
2000 miles (3,500 km).
• Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
WARNING
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) as
the tire can overheat and adversely
affect the handling of the car.
• Tire pressure: refer to page 279.
Important considerations when driving with
a compact spare tire:
• The spare wheel or punctured tire
must be stowed under the trunk floor,
andsecuredinplacewiththeretaining
nut.
• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
• Thecarmustnotbedrivenwithmorethan
one compact tire at a time.
• Avoid driving against a curb.
• Do not use snow chains.
• Do not fit the wheel cover - this would con-
ceal the warning text.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel it can be placed outside up in the
spare-wheel well but only while driving to
the closest workshop.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 137 and 140.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
Starting and driving
Driving with the trunk
lid/tailgate open
Driving in deep water
Towing the car
NOTICE
WARNING
Avoiddrivingwiththetrunk lid/tailgatepartly
or fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
drawn into the cabin.
Do not drive in water deeper than
12 inches (30 cm) and do not drive faster
than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be
suckedintotheengine.Theenginewillbe
seriously damaged if water enters the
intake system.
• Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off.
Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate
the brake pedal.
If you must drive with the trunk lid/tailgate
open, all windows and the sunroof (if fitted)
must be closed and the cabin fan on at its
highest speed setting.
• Nor does the steering servo operate
when the engine is off. The steering
will therefore be much heavier than
usual.
• The towing vehicle should always be
heavier than the vehicle on tow.
• Never allow passengers to ride in the
car being towed.
• Always seek professional help if the
car needs to be towed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 189
Front towing eye
WARNING
• Make sure that the towing eye at the
front is screwed in tightly.
• The towing eye is only designed for
usewhenthecarisbeingtowedonthe
road. It must not be used to pull the
car out of a ditch, for example.
• Make sure that all bystanders keep a
suitable distance, in case the towing
eye or tow rope should break. The
towing eye or tow rope could catapult
off and cause seriously injury.
Front towing eye
Rear towing eye
Thefront towingeyeisstoredwiththe spare
wheel.
Rear towing eye
The car has a permanently mounted towing
eye at the back. If the car is equipped with a
trailer hitch, this can be used instead of the
towing eye.
The attachment point (tapped hole) for the
towing eye is midway along the engine sub-
frame at the front of the car.
Remove the plastic plug and screw in the
towing eye securely.
To ensure that the towing eye is in far
enough, insert the handle of the wheel
wrench through the eye for additional lever-
age.
NOTICE
• Do not drive the car with the front
towing eye in position. If it catches the
curb, for example, the engine sub-
frame could be damaged.
• Refit the plastic plug in the hole when
the towing eye has been removed, to
keep dirt and moisture out of the
threads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
Starting and driving
Towing the car
Transporting the car
NOTICE
• Never use the towing eyes to pull the
If a car with a sport (lowered) chassis is
transported, for example on a flat bed
truck, take extra care not to damage the
spoiler and/or underbody.
car unstuck.
Gear lever in neutral (in cars with automatic
transmission: selector lever at N (neutral))
Turn on the parking lights.
Drive carefully and do not exceed the
speed limit for vehicles being towed.
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake, as necessary.
This will avoid the towrope being jerked
violently.
Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck
Cars with automatic transmission
The local regulations on towing speeds
must be followed.
The highest permissible towing speed is
30 mph (50 km/h), unless the legal limit is
lower. The longest permissible towing dis-
tance is 30 miles (50 km). If the car has to
be transported farther than that, summon a
tow truck. A flat bed tow truck is the pre-
ferred method to tow.
NOTICE
• The car must be towed front first.
• If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels.
Failure to follow these guidelines can result
in damage.
The car cannot be bump started. In an
emergency, it is possible to start the engine
using jump leads (see the section, ”Jump
starting” on page 191).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 191
To jump start your vehicle:
Jump starting
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
WARNING
• When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery.
Therefore, always avoid sparks and
open flames in the vicinity of the bat-
tery.
NOTICE
–
–
+
If the other system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged.
+
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumpercablescanreach,butbesurethe
vehiclesarenottouchingeachother. If a
poor connection on the negative jumper
cable should exist, it is possible for
damage to be caused to electrical sys-
tems/components of either vehicle
should inadvertent contact be made.
You would not be able to start your car
and bad grounding could damage elec-
trical systems.
• The battery containscorrosivesulfuric
acid. Always wear a face mask or gog-
gles when working on the battery.
NOTICE
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
the affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. If you
have an automatic transmission, your
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling it.
• Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling.
WARNING
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P
(Park) or a manual transmission in Neu-
tral.
If your battery has run down, you may want
to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your Saab. Follow the steps
below to do it safely.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off all lights that are not needed,
and radios. This will avoid sparks and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
Starting and driving
help save both batteries and it could
save your radio.
5 Check that the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock and also the
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (–) will go to a major metal
engine part with a good ground. Do not
connect (+) to (–) or you will get a short
that could injure you or would damage
the battery and maybe other parts as
well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
WARNING
NOTICE
Using a match or flame of any kind near a
battery can cause battery gas to explode.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
If you leave your radio on, it could be
badly damaged. The repairs wouldnotbe
covered by your warranty.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
The battery installed in your new Saab
has filler caps. Be sure the right amount
of water is there. Add distilled or boiled
water if the level is too low. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-
nals on the battery.
WARNING
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
When connecting jumper cables to a
frozen battery, gas from the chemical
reaction inside the battery can build up
under the ice and cause an explosion.
Anelectric fancan startup even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keephands,clothingandtoolsawayfrom
any underhood electric fan.
8 Now connect the black negative (–)
cable to the good battery’s negative ter-
minal.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
flush the area with water and get medical
help immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 193
Charging the battery/Jump starting
To avoid damaging the car’s electrical
system and electronics, the following rules
must be followed when charging the battery
or jump starting the car.
WARNING
Do not let the other end touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the
negative cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a major metal part with
a good ground on the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
• If the charger or starter unit can be set to
differentvoltages(6V/12V/18V/24V),12V
must be selected.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
supplied with the charger or starter unit.
9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from the discharged bat-
tery, but not near engine parts that
move. To avoid an arc which could deto-
nate the hydrogen gas around the bat-
tery,thefinalconnectionmustbeatleast
18” from the battery.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery. If it does not start after
a few tries, it probably needs service.
• No other apparatus that are grounded or
connected to the mains must be
connected to the car during charging or
jump starting.
• The charger or starter unit must under no
conditions produce a voltage greater
than:
• 16V continuous
• 18V for 60 min.
• If you are unsure about the charge rating
of the unit, disconnect the battery clamp
from the positive terminal before connect-
ing the unit to the battery.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they do not touch each other or any
other metal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Starting and driving
Saab Parking
Assistance
(Option)
WARNING
Responsibility always lies with the driver
when reversing.
• SaabParkingAssistancecanfacilitate
reversingatlowspeeds,suchaswhen
reverse parking.
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
the side
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
above
• Bear in mind that small and/or narrow
objects cannot always be detected by
the system.
The system uses four sensors in the rear
bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
bounce back to the sensors off any objects
behind the car. The system, however,
cannot always detect small or narrow
objects or objects that do not reflect ultra-
sound back towards the car, such as pipes,
or the corner of a house or rectangular post.
The system is activated automatically when
reverse is engaged or selected. When the
sensors detect an object within the moni-
tored area, the SID will display the text
"PARK ASSIST" and pulses of sound
(- - - - -) will be heard. The frequency of the
pulses increases as the car comes closer to
the object.
The parking aid system facilitates parking
and reversing. There are four sensors in
the rear bumper that detect objects up to 6
feet (1.8 metres) behind the car.
When the distance to the object is less
than 12 in. (30 cm), a continuous tone
will be heard.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 195
Pressing a SID button briefly will not disen-
gage the system, the display will simply
show the previously selected function.
NOTICE
Reverse slowly so that you have time to
stop the car when the continuous tone is
heard at approx. 12 in. (30 cm).
NOTICE
Tofunctionwell,thesensorsmustbekept
clean. Ice snow and dirt can affect their
sensitivity.
When an object is approximately 3 feet
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
change character markedly. A distance of
about 3 feet (90 cm) is suitable if you wish
to load or unload the luggage compartment.
Do not spray the sensors or closer than
8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with a pres-
sure washer, as this could damage them.
If the distance between an object and the
corner sensors does not change for three
seconds, e.g. if you are reversing alongside
a wall, the system will switch to monitoring
straight back. The system indicates if the
distance to the wall decreases again.
The system can be disengaged for when
driving with a trailer. Press and hold the
CLEAR button on the SID when the display
shows "PARK ASSIST", until the display
shows"PARK ASSIST OFF". Thesystem is
re-engaged in the same way. The system is
also always activated when the ignition key
is turned to ON.
Ice, snow and dirt can affect the sensitivity
of the sensors. In such cases a continuous
tone will sound warning the driver that the
system cannot measure the distance to an
object. You canturnthesystem off bypress-
ing and holding the CLEAR button for
1.5 seconds.
If the text "PARK ASSIST FAILURE" is dis-
played on the SID, have the system
checked by an authorized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
Starting and driving
Parking brake
Parking
WARNING
WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake when
you park the car.
• Do not leave children or pets unat-
tended in the car. In warm, sunny
weather, the temperature inside the
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
• Always apply the parking brake
before removing the ignition key.
• Park where the vehicle will not create
an obstruction or a hazard to other
road users.
• Do not use the parking brake while
driving.
• Do not park on dry grass or other com-
bustible material. The catalytic con-
verter gets very hot and could start a
fire.
The parking brake is situated between the
front seats and acts on the rear wheels.
When the parking brake is on, the indicator
light
on the main instrument panel will
• Apply the parking brake.
be on. To release the parking brake, lift the
lever slightly, press the release button and
release the lever by pushing down on it.
• Shift to Reverse for manual transmis-
sion (automatic transmission: move
selectorlevertoP(Park)),andremove
the ignition key. Lock the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 197
NOTICE
Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
• Never leave a mobile phone, camera,
computer or similar object visible in
your car.
• Clothing, packages and bags attract
thieves.
• Do not leave small objects such as
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
1
2
3
• If possible, park in a well-lit,
conspicuous parking space.
1 Pointing downhill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels into
the curb and edge the
car forward until the
wheels touch the curb.
2 Pointing uphill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels away
from the curb and edge
the car back until the
wheels touch the curb.
3 Pointing uphill or
downhill – no curb
– Turn the wheels
towards the edge of the
road. If the car should
startrolling,itwillnotrun
into the road.
• Thieves strike whenever and wher-
ever they are given the opportunity.
Parking on a hill
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
wheels so that they will be blocked by the
curb if the car should move.
Long-term parking
If the car is not going to be used for some
time, e.g. 3–4 months, the following steps
are recommended:
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs
by taking the car out on the road and
applying the brakes a few times.
• Fill the fuel tank with fuel to prevent con-
densation forming in it.
• Top up the coolant and check the anti-
freeze before the onset of winter.
• Park the car in a dry, covered and
well-ventilated building. Leave the park-
ing brake OFF!
long-term parking, remove the battery
and store it away from the frost.
• Ideally,thecarshouldbeputuponblocks,
withthewheelsofftheground.Ifthisisnot
possible, inflate the tires to about 43 psi
(300 kPa).
• Leave all the windows open a crack and
cover the car with a fabric tarpaulin – not
one made of plastic.
• Run the engine to normal temperature
before long-term parking.
• Drain the washer-fluid reservoir and
hoses.
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
seals on the hood, luggage compartment
lid and doors, and lubricate them with
glycerol (glycerin).
• Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
If frost is likely to occur during the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
Starting and driving
(This page has been left blank)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and
technical
information
Fuses _______________
Tires ________________
Compact spare tire ____
Air conditioning (ACC) _
Safety belts __________
Upholstery and trim ___
Textile carpeting ______
Washing the car ______
Waxing and polishing __
Engine compartment __
Touching up the paint__
Anti-corrosion treatment
215
227
233
252
253
253
253
254
255
255
255
256
For long trips_________
258
Hood ________________
Engine compartment___
200
201
of automotive materials
258
259
Emission control systems 202
Engine_______________
Engine oil ____________
Transmission fluid_____
Coolant ______________
Brake and clutch fluid__
Power steering fluid ___
Air filter______________
Battery ______________
Drive belts ___________
Wipers and washers ___
203
204
206
207
208
209
209
210
212
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200
Car care and technical information
Hood
The hood release handle is located under-
neath the instrument panel. To open the
hood:
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The front of the hood will now spring up,
providing access to the secondary
safety catch.
3 Push the catch upwards, lifting the hood
at the same time. The hood can now be
lifted right up.
To close the hood, release it from a height
ofabout8 in(20 cm). Donotpress down on
it.
Hood release handle
Hood secondary safety catch
WARNING
Neverholdyourfingersbetweenthehood
and safety catch if lowering but not clos-
ing the hood.
In cold weather, when the mechanism is
stiff, the hood might need to be released
from twice the height to lock properly.
Check that the hood is now closed securely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 201
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
1 Engine-oil dipstick/filler cap
2 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid
3 Fuse box
4 Expansion tank, coolant
5 Washer-fluid filler cap
6 Battery
7 Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid
8 Turbo unit
9 Ignition discharge module
10 Reservoir, power-steering fluid
1
2
3
4
10
9
8
7
6
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
Car care and technical information
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
Engine families
Emission control
systems
Saab cars imported into the United States
and Canada meet all applicable emission
control standards. The engine family and
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
tified on a label affixed to the left front inner
fender.
These engine families meet applicable EPA
Federal Standards, California State Stan-
dardsandCanadianFederalStandardsand
are equipped with the following systems:
Thesystems forcontrollingemissionstothe
atmosphere require regular checking and
adjustment at the intervals specified in the
service program.
• Intake manifold pressure.
• Intake air temperature.
• Crankshaft position.
• Engine coolant temperature.
• Throttle position and
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
regulations and thereby helping to keep the
environmentclean,acorrectlytunedengine
will also give maximum fuel economy.
• Sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem.
WARNING
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector open-
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-
charger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.
• Three way catalytic converter.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
CA to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
forniatocausecancerandbirthdefectsor
other reproductive harm.
• Crankcase emissions control system.
• Evaporative emission control system.
• On-Board diagnostic (OBD II) system.
NOTICE
TheTrionicenginemanagementsystems
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and have on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II).
Saab Trionic engine management
system
If the ”Engine malfunction (CHECK
The Saab Trionic engine management
system is a unique Saab development that
combinessequentialmultiportfuelinjection,
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-
charger boost pressure control into one sys-
tem.
ENGINE)” lamp
in the main instru-
ment illuminates, this indicates that the
TrionicECMhasdetectedaproblem. The
car will continue to operate, but perfor-
mance may be diminished. You should
have your car checked by a Saab dealer
as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 203
The transmission, located on the right
(viewed from the front), is integrated with
the engine. All models have front-wheel
drive.
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
Engine
The 2.3-liter model is a transverse, 4-cylin-
der in-line engine with twin overhead cam-
shafts and 4 valves per cylinder.
Hydrocarbon vapors formedwhenrefueling
will be recovered by the car and not
released into the atmosphere. The hydro-
carbons are absorbed in a evaporative
emission canister. When the engine is sub-
sequentlystarted,theevaporativeemission
canister is gradually purged as air is sucked
into it through a shut-off valve. The hydro-
carbon/air mixture passes through the evap
canister purge valve and into the engine
where it is burned.
When refueling, make sure you screw the
filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked at least 3 times. Otherwise, it is pos-
sible for the CHECK ENGINE light to illumi-
nateanda ”Tightenfuelfiller cap.” message
to appear on SID.
This engine is equipped with balance shafts
that reduce engine vibration to a minimum.
The balance shafts are chain driven and
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are
opposed to those generated by the pistons
and connecting rods, an effect that occurs
twice for each revolution of the engine.
Engine noise is also reduced as the
counter-rotating shafts counteract the vibra-
tion from the moving parts of the engine.
Refueling, see page 154.
Balance shafts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
Car care and technical information
Changing engine oil
WARNING
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine-oil level regularly. This
should be done after the engine has been
runtonormal temperatureandthen allowed
to cool for 2–5 minutes, with the car stand-
ing on level ground. Remove the dipstick
and wipe it clean before checking the level.
• Prolonged and repeated exposure of
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-
ous skin disorders. Avoid prolonged
skin contact whenever possible.
The oil level must not be allowed to drop
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor
shouldoilbefilledbeyondtheMAXmark,as
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).
• Used engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by
washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Engine-oil filler cap and dipstick
• Keep oil out of reach of children.
When necessary, add oil of the recom-
mended grade via the dipstick tube.
• Do not touch the turbocharger or
exhaust manifold. These get very hot
when the engine has been running.
• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
engineasthiscouldcauseafire. Used
engine oil is particularly flammable.
• Protect the environment. Do not dis-
pose of oil in the ground or down a
drain. Dispose of all used oil and oil fil-
ters at an appropriate disposal facility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 205
The engine oil must be changed in accor-
dance with the service program, see page
264.
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
required more frequently, see page 264.
Oil volume and grade, see page 273.
Oil changing should be carried out on a
warm engine.
1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of
the sump and leave the oil to drain into
anoiltrayorothersuitablereceptaclefor
atleasttenminutes. Takecare, as theoil
may be hot.
2 After the oil has been drained, unscrew
and remove the oil filter.
3 Fit a new filter and tighten it by hand.
4 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
5 Fill with new engine oil.
Drain plug and oil filter
Run the engine to normal temperature and
check the oil level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
Car care and technical information
Transmission fluid
Manual transmission
NOTICE
Check and top up the fluid in accordance
with the service program.
If there is a smell of burning fluid or the
fluid is black, change the fluid.
If original fluid cannot be obtained for top-
ping up (see page 276), automatic trans-
missionfluidDexronIII(syntheticoil)canbe
used. If so, the car should be taken to an
authorized Saab dealer immediately to
have the reason for low fluid level corrected
and original fluid installed.
If the outside temperature is below 50°F
(10°C), the fluid will not reach the specified
temperature of 175°F (80°C). In this case,
the correct fluid levelmay be 0.8 in (20 mm)
below the MAX mark.
Automatic transmission
Check the fluid level as follows:
Dipstick for automatic-transmission fluid
1 Stand the car on level ground and apply
the parking brake. The automatic trans-
mission fluid must be at normal running
temperature, approximately 175°F
(80°C). This can be achieved by driving
the car for about 30 min on the open
road.
2 Withtheengineidling,movetheselector
lever to D and wait for at least
15 seconds. Next, move the selector
levertoRandwaitfor15 secondsagain.
Finally, move the selector lever to P. Let
the engine idle.
3 Wipe the dipstick clean with a lint-free
cloth and put it back.
4 Withthe fluid at normaltemperature, the
level should be between the MAX and
MIN marks on the dipstick. Top up, as
necessary, with Saab 3309 automatic
transmission fluid (mineral oil-based),
adding it through the dipstick pipe. The
distance between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
volume of approximately 0.4 qts
(0.4 liter).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 207
Note:
Coolant
If incorrect coolant is used or added, the
life-time properties will be affected. Even if
the coolant is flushed from the system and
replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
properties are no longer retained and the
coolant must then be drained and replaced
at regular intervals.
WARNING
• Proceed with caution if the radiator is
boiling when you open the hood.
Never remove the expansion-tank
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
• The cooling system is pressurized –
hot coolant and vapor can escape
when the filler cap is released. These
can cause injury to your eyes and
burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
let the engine cool before removing
the cap.
NOTICE
Always mix the antifreeze with the
appropriate volume of water before
adding it to the cooling system.
Coolant expansion tank
If pure antifreeze is added, the engine
could still freeze and be damaged. This is
because the antifreeze will not mix
properly with the coolant before the
thermostat has opened to allow full
circulation.
• Exercise care when adding coolant.
Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
fire risk.
Coolant
Thecoolingsystem ischargedat thefactory
with coolant containing a 45 % concentra-
tion of a combined antifreeze and corrosion
inhibitor. A weaker mixture will result in
reduced anticorrosion protection. For pro-
tection against freezing in very cold
weather, a stronger concentration will be
needed.
The expansion tank is transparent to facili-
tate checking of the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant must
not lie over the KALT/COLD mark on the
expansion tank.
If the message ”Coolant level low. Refill.” is
displayedontheSID, check theleveloffluid
in the expansion tank.
A 60 % concentration of antifreeze will pro-
vide protection at temperatures down to
-58 F (–50°C).
Top up, as necessary, with equal parts of
clean water and Saab-approved coolant.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine to normal temper-
ature and top up again, as necessary.
The coolant does not normally have to be
changed during the service life of the car.
Thetypeofcoolantusedhas areddishcolor
and should not be mixed with other types of
coolant. Saab Original coolant should be
used all year round. Only use coolant
approved by Saab.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
Car care and technical information
Brake pad wear indicators
Brake and clutch fluid
The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 0.11 in (3 mm),
the pad will produce a screeching, squeal-
ing or scraping noise when the brakes are
applied. New pads should be fitted without
delay.
Brake pads should only be changed by
an authorized Saab dealer. To ensure
optimum brake performance, use only
Saab original brake pads.
WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
waterfromtheairand, intime, couldallow
vapor to form in the brake system, thus
reducing its performance. It is therefore
important that brakefluid be changedreg-
ularly, as specified in the service pro-
gram.
Brake and clutch-fluid reservoir
Checking the fluid level
The combined brake and clutch-fluid reser-
voir is transparent to facilitate checking of
the fluid level.
The level should be between the MAX and
MIN marks. Top up, as necessary, with
DOT 4 fluid. Do not use DOT 5 brake fluid.
The vehicle´s regular braking system is
adjusted automatically, but the parking
brake has to be adjusted manually. This
work, involving adjustment of the parking
brake cables and brake pads, must only be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed con-
tainer.
Check that there are no leaks in the brake
system.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
reservoir corresponds to the amount of
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
necessary.
Itisnotpossibletodetect,throughabnormal
pedal or parkingbrake-lever travel, whether
brake pads are worn and need replacing. It
is therefore essential that brake pads be
checked regularly, as specified in the ser-
vice program.
NOTICE
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
since it can cause the paint to bubble and
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
should be flushed with large quantities of
water as quickly as possible.
Changing of the brake fluid should be
carried out byanauthorized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 209
Power steering fluid
Air filter
WARNING
WARNING
Do not fill the power steering fluid to
above the MAX mark. Too much fluid can
result in leakage.
For Service and Repair, parts equivalent
to those used by Saab should be used.
Be aware that some non standard
replacement parts may put you in an
unsafe condition, even if they might fit.
Power steering fluid on hot engine com-
ponents constitutes a fire risk.
Check the levelof thepowersteeringfluidin
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
Power steering fluid reservoir
The wheels should point forward during the
check.
Clean around the cap before it is
unscrewed. Clean the dipstick. Screw in the
cap completely again before checking the
level.
TheoilshouldliebetweentheMAXandMIN
marks when the oil temperature is about
70°F(+20°C). Iftheoiliscolderthelevelcan
be lower, and in higher temperatures the
level can be higher, both of which are
acceptable.
Top up with ”Power Steering Fluid
CHF 11S”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
Car care and technical information
Battery
NOTICE
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture.Batteriesshouldthereforealwaysbe
stored away from frost.
• Work on the battery may entail an
explosion hazard, since the battery
gives off hydrogen which forms an
explosive mixture with the oxygen in
the air.
For this reason, always avoid sparks
or openflames when working near the
battery.
If frequent short journeys are made, the bat-
tery may needto begiven abooster charge.
This can be done either using a battery
charger or by taking the car for a long run.
A car with a standard equipment specifica-
tion and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a car phone, the charge may
only be sufficient for about 15 days.
• The battery containscorrosivesulfuric
acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
Electrolyte level indicator.
Level correct if level indicator dark.
Battery should be changed if indicator is
light
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashestheskinorclothing,washthe
affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
The battery is provided with a cover to pro-
tect it from radiated heat. If the battery is
exposed to high temperatures, its life will be
shortened. To remove the cover, release
the two clips along its long sides.
The cover fits the standard battery installed
in the car. If a new battery is to be fitted,
make sure that its dimensions are the same
as the standard one.
• Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling.
The battery is maintenance free and should
be changedif theelectrolyte level is too low.
The indicator on the top side of the battery
will be white if the battery needs replacing.
The fluid level and the charge level should
be checked regularly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 211
To remove the battery, always disconnect
thenegative(black) leadfirstandreconnect
it last when fitting the new battery.
The battery size must comply with DIN
53735 MFI 230/2.16.
NOTICE
• If boost charging never use anything
but a 12-volt charger, see page 193.
• Never reverse the polarity of the bat-
tery by connecting the leads to the
wrong terminals. The red, positive
lead connects to the positive (+) termi-
nal, andtheblack, negativeleadtothe
negative (–) terminal.
Battery
Correct position for battery clamp
• Seriousdamagecanoccurtothecar´s
electrical systemif abattery or alterna-
tor lead is disconnected while the
engine is running.
Charging/replacing the battery
NOTICE
• The nut on the battery clamp should
be tightened to a torque of 10 Nm.
To avert the danger of short-circuiting
between the positive (+) terminal on the
battery and the inlet manifold on the
engine, always disconnect the negative
(–) battery lead first and reconnect it last.
Connect the positive lead to the positive (+)
battery terminal (red), andthenegativelead
to a good ground point, e.g. the lifting lug at
the front of the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
Car care and technical information
Drive belts
WARNING
• Keephands and clothing clearofdrive
belts when engine is running.
• Always stop the engine before
inspecting drive belt.
• The radiator fan is electric and can
start even when the engine is
switched off.
Routing of the drive belt
NOTICE
Serious damage can be done to the car’s
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running.
The alternator is situated on the right-hand
sideoftheengine, adjacenttothebulkhead.
It is driven via a Poly-V-belt from the crank-
shaft pulley.
ThePoly-V-beltalso drives thewater pump,
the A/C compressor and the steering servo
pump.
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
automatically by the belt tensioner.
See also page 55, ”Warning, charging”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 213
Wipers and washers
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
clean the windshield with a quality glass
cleaner. This is particularly important if the
car has been through an automatic car
wash, as these sometimes leave a wax
coating on the windshield.
1
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.
2
Cleaning/adjusting the washer jets
Changing the windshield wiper
blades
Lift the wiper arm off the windshield
Washer jets
The washer jets can be adjusted and, if
necessary, unclogged by means of a pin.
1 Depress the catch.
2 Pull the complete blade assembly down
to free it from the wiper arm, and then lift
it off the arm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
Car care and technical information
Adjusting the washer jet on the rear
window wiper, 9-5 Wagon
Washer-fluid filler cap
The headlights have high-pressure
washers (certain variants)
Washers
Use a small screwdriver to adjust the
washer jet on the rear window wiper of the
9-5 Wagon, as illustrated.
The washer-fluid reservoir holds 6.4 quarts
(6 liters). When "Washer fluid level low.
Refill."comes upon the SID, thereservoir is
down to about 1 quart (1 liter) of fluid. Add
at least 50 %of washer- fluid to water to pre-
vent freezing and for effective cleaning.
WARNING
Take care not to spill washer fluid
concentrate onto hot surfaces. Washer
fluid concentrate contains flammable
ingredients such as alcohol.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 215
Changing bulbs
NOTICE
• Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W, since the head-
light reflector and the wiring of the car are not designed for a
higher wattage.
WARNING
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine to
avoid danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving parts.
• Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possi-
ble short-circuiting.
The radiator fan can start up even when the engine is switched off.
• Do not touch the glass of the bulbs with your fingers. The oil
on your skin can shorten the life of the bulb.
Xenon headlights are high voltage and must therefore be
changed at an authorized Saab workshop. Work involving
high-voltage components is potentially lethal.
Xenon headlight (certain variants)
Xenon headlights produce roughly twice as much light as halogen
bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge lamp containing xenon.
When the lights are switched on a very high voltage activates the
xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full intensity.
Cars with xenon headlights have automatic levelling. The levelling
and a control unit under the headlight housing. Headlight alignment
is regulated automatically to prevent dazzling oncoming traffic.
Alignment is also adjusted during braking.
NOTICE
• Since the headlight lenses are made of plastic, rinse dried-on
dirt with water and allow it time to soften up before cleaning
the lenses. Avoid rubbing the lenses when dry and never use
solvents.
• Use de-icer spray instead of scraping the ice off.
Check that the new bulb is working when finished.
Use only "Long Life" bulbs.
Headlight aiming, see page 259.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
Car care and technical information
Make sure the cover is correctly fitted before locking it in place
Headlight bulb for high beam (Halogen)
On cars equipped with Xenon lamps the Halogen lamps are used
only for high beam flasher if the daytime running lights are deacti-
vatedandtheheadlight switchis intheoffposition (otherwise Xenon
lamp is utilized):
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve
accessibility to the right-handheadlight, hold asidethe induction
air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,
remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long
sides of the cover.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with
thespring clip. Look through theheadlight lenstohelpfitthebulb
correctly.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover. Make sure that the guide on the cover is
aligned with the recess in the lamp housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 217
Make sure the cover is correctly fitted before locking it in place
Headlight bulb for low beam (Halogen)
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve
accessibility to the right-handheadlight, hold asidethe induction
air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,
remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long
sides of the cover.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
Look through the headlight lens to help fit the bulb correctly.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with
the spring clip.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover. Make sure that the guide on the cover is
aligned with the recess in the lamp housing.
Contact an
authorized
Saabworkshop
if a Xenon
headlight
requires
replacement
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
Car care and technical information
Parking-light bulb (cars with halogen low
beam)
Parking-light bulb (cars with Bi-Xenon low
beam)
Front fog lights
Parking-light bulb (cars with halo-
gen low beam)
Theparking-lightbulbisadjacenttothebulb
for low beam.
Parking-light bulb (cars with Xenon
low beam)
The parking light bulb is adjacent to the
Xenon lamp.
Front fog lights (certain variants)
1 From under the front bumper, grip the
bulb holder and twist counterclockwise.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 Change the bulb.
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the
lamp unit.
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the
lamp unit.
Refit in the reverse order.
2 Withdraw the bulb holder.
3 Change the bulb.
2 Take hold of the lamp leads and pull out
the bulb holder. The lamp leads are rein-
forced to facilitate changing bulbs.
WARNING
3 Change the bulb. Look through the
headlight lens to help fit the bulb cor-
rectly.
• Never crawl under a car that is sup-
ported only by a jack.
• Always use axle stands. Refer to the
information on jacks on page 247.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 219
2
3
1
3
Catch seen from engine bay, left-hand
side
Front turn signal bulb
1 Catch
2 Bayonet pin
3 Plastic lugs
Front turn signal bulbs
To change the bulb, the complete lamp unit
has to be removed.
1 Depress the catch, accessed from the
engine bay.
2 Carefully pull out the lamp unit.
3 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
Grip the holder and twist it counterclock-
wise.
4 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
unit.
Catch seen from engine bay, right-hand
side
To re-install the lamp unit
1 Align the catch with the recess in the
lamp housing holder.
2 Press the lamp housing towards the
headlight slightly and press the housing
towards the rear of the car.
3 Make sure the locating pin and the two
plastic lugs enter their respective holes.
4 Press the lamp housing until it click into
place.
5 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
6 Fit the new bulb and check that it is cor-
rectly seated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220
Car care and technical information
4
5
4
1
1
6
3
3
2
2
Rear light clusters
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan
1 Direction indicators
2 Taillights
The bulbs for the lamps in the rear light clus-
ter are accessed from the luggage compart-
ment.
3 Stop lights and taillights
4 Reversing lights
5 Rear fog light
Trunk lid light and taillights,
9-5 Sedan
Before changing bulbs in the trunk, you
must first release the trim at the foot of the
trunk. This involves removing the handle
and the three trim fasteners (studs).
1 Lower the flap (secured with catches).
6 High-mounted brake light
2 Squeeze the two plastic lugs and
remove the bulb holder.
3 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
4
1
4
4 Change the bulb.
1
1 Unscrew the handle on the inside of the
tailgate.
2 Using the peg in the top of the screw-
driver handle, push in the button in the
center of the studs.
6
3 Remove the studs.
Changing bulbs
2
5
2
3
3
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 221
High-mounted stop lights, 9-5 Sedan
The bulbs can be accessed after the panel
in the rear headlining has been removed.
1 Remove the panel by carefully pushing
in the two clips, one at the time.
2 Release the bulb holder, which is
retained by a clip at either end.
2
3
3
2
3 Withdraw the bulb gently straight back.
4 Push in the new bulb.
1
5 Refit the bulb holder.
6 Replace the panel by carefully pushing
the panel towards the headlining so that
the two clips engage their respective
slot.
High-mounted stop lights
1 Panel
2 Retaining clips
3 Bulbs
1 Squeeze together the silver plastic lug
and the electrical connection and with-
draw the lamp holder.
2 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
3 Change the bulb.
Refitting the trim
1 Reset the studs by pushing back the
center buttons so that they protrude by
0.2 inch (5 mm).
2 Insert the studs through the trim and tail-
gate panel. Press the center buttons in,
flush with the collar.
3 Screw the handle back onto the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222
Car care and technical information
Reassembly:
Tailgate bulbs, 9-5 Wagon
Rear lights clusters, 9-5 Wagon
1 Place the two ”hinges” in the recess in
the tailgate.
2 Then push the ”hinges” into the recess
and close the cover.
1 Turn the lock a quarter turn (90°) with a
screwdriver or the ignition key.
2 Open and remove the cover.
1 Open the tailgate.
2 Remove the cover by turning the two
catches anticlockwise one quarter turn.
3 Turn the lock a quarter turn.
3 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it
slightly counterlockwise.
3 Remove the two screws securing the
light cluster to the body.
4 Press in the bulb and twist it
counterclockwise.
5 Change the bulb.
6 Check that the new bulb is working.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 223
Reassembly:
4 Pull the light cluster rearwards and
angle it outwards (it is seated quite
firmly).
5 Release the fastener from the body.
Reinsert the fastener into the groove in
the light cluster. Press in the fastener
until you hear a click.
Loading lighting, 9-5 Wagon
1 Align the fastener with the hole in the
body.
2 Press the lamp unit home into the body
until you hear a click.
1 Pull down the glass cover at the outer
edge.
2 Bendoneofthecontactssothatthebulb
can be removed.
3 Fit the screws and cover.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
6 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it
slightly counterclockwise.
7 Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
8 Change the bulb.
9 Check that the new bulb works.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
Car care and technical information
License-plate light
Side direction indicators
Courtesy lights (doors and floor)
and luggage-compartment lighting
1 Undo the two screws and remove the
lamp glass.
2 Withdraw the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
4 Check the seal before fitting the glass.
1 Slidethelampfittingforwardandpullout
the back.
2 Remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, make sure that the spring in the
lamp fitting engages the edge of the open-
ing in the body panel.
1 Insert a screwdriver carefully into the
slot in the end of the lamp fitting. Ease
the fitting off to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 225
Dome light, front
Dome light, rear
Glove-compartment illumination
1 Ease the leading edge of the glass out
of the overhead panel.
2 Releaseoneofthecontactsandremove
the bulb.
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
ease out the trailing end first, and then
both front edges.
1 Insert a small screwdriver in the slot in
the end of the lamp fitting and ease it out
to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, you are
advised to take the car to an authorized
Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
Car care and technical information
Bulb table
1
7
#
1
2
3
Cap
H7
H1
Wattage
55
55
21
Headlight
Fog light
Reversinglamp;sidereversinglamp;
rear fog lamp; cornering lamp
Stop/tail lamp
Direction indicator, front/rear
Dome light; courtesy lights; glove
compartment;luggagecompartment
Safety belt reminder
P21W
2
3
4
5
6
8
4
5
6
P21/5W 21/5
P21W
R10W
21
10
9
7
8
R5W
Xenon
w9U
5
6
Reading light, overhead panel
10
11
9
T4W
4
5
Reading light, rear
10 WY5W/
W5W
Side indicators (yellow);/
High-mountedstoplight(9-5Sedan);
parking lights; license plate illumina-
tion
11 W2W
1,2
Switches; front ashtray
NOTICE
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.
A special kit containing spare bulbs and fuses is available as an
accessory from your Saab dealer. A storage space for this is pro-
vided adjacent to the toolkit and jack, under the panel in the luggage
compartment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 227
Fuses
WARNING
To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
fire breaking out in the electrical system,
the following advice should be heeded:
Sound fuse / Blown fuse
• Always consult an authorized Saab
dealer before modifying or adding any
electrical equipment. Failure to do so
can result in the electrical system
being damaged.
The fuses are housed in two fuse panels:
oneattheendoftheinstrumentpanelonthe
driver’s side, and one under the hood.
Fuse panel in instrument panel
Fuse box under the hood
• Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher/lower rating than specified
(see page 229). The color of the fuse
indicates its amperage.
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel (see below). If the filament is
broken, the fuse has blown.
at the bottom of the fuse panel. Simply push
the tool onto the fuse, squeeze and remove
the fuse.
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
an authorized Saab dealer.
• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
there is a major fault in the electrical
system. Have the car checked by an
authorized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
Car care and technical information
The DICE and TWICE control modules are
linked to a data bus, which is basically an
informationcarrierthatallowsinformationto
be exchanged between all the control mod-
ules and components connected to the bus.
If a fault occurs inany of thesecomponents,
diagnostic faults codes are set in the rele-
vant control module, which facilitates fault
diagnosis at the Saab dealer.
DICE / TWICE
DICE = Dashboard Integrated Central Elec-
tronics
TWICE=Theft-WarningCentralElectronics
DICE and TWICE are electronic control
modules that monitor and control a variety
of functions, including:
DICE controls (among other things):
• Front lights and interior lighting
• Instrument illumination
The scan tool connector for fault diagnosis
is located under the instrument panelon the
drivers side.
• Intermittent wiper operation
• Electric heating of rear window and door
mirrors
• Cooling fans
Maxi fuses under the hood
TWICE controls (among other things):
• Central locking.
Maxi fuses
• Car alarm (Anti-theft system)
• Engine immobilizer
• Autochecking of lights.
• Electric heating of rear seat
• Safety belt reminder
The Maxi fuses are housed in the fuse box
under the hood. These fuses can be
checked in the sameway as the other fuses.
The Maxi fuses are designed to protect the
car’s electrical system from being dam-
aged. Each Maxi fuse protects a number of
electrical circuits and functions and there-
forehasahigherrating(amperage)thanthe
standard fuses. No spare Maxi fuses are
supplied with the car.
• Electrically adjustable passenger seat
NOTICE
If a Maxi fuse blows, it means that there is
a major fault in the electrical system.
Have the carcheckedwithoutdelay by an
authorized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 229
7
8
10
15
Engine injectors
Trunk lighting; trunk lock; door lighting, circulation
pump; parking assistant; SID
A B C
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16B
17
15
15
30
Audio System; CD changer
Heating, rear seat; sunroof, remote control receiver
Electrically adjusted passenger seat
14
15 16
6B 7
8
9
10 11 12 13
16B17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
32 33 34 35 36
7.5 Automatic transmission
20
Audio System, amplifier
Ignition system, engine
Fuel pump
30
20
20
–
37 38 39
DICE (direction indicators)
–
20
Engine-management system; main instrument;
DICE/TWICE
Fuse panel in instrument panel
Amp Function
18
19
20
21
40
10
15
10
Door-mirror heating; rear-window heating
OnStar; Telematics
#
A
30
10
Trailer lights
ACC; interior lighting;rear fog light; high beam flasher
B
C
Automatic transmission
Audio System; rear-view mirror; load angle sensor
(cars with xenon); navigation (accessory); Cruise
Control
7.5 Electric door mirrors; DICE: manual beam length
adjustment
1
15
Brake lights
22
23
40
15
Interior fan
2
15
10
10
Reversing lights
Parking lights, left
Parking lights, right
Central locking; navigation (accessory); door mirror
memory
3
4
24
25
26
40
30
Air pump (3.0t V6 only)
5
7.5 DICE / TWICE
30 Electric windows, right; trailer charging
7.5 Brake lights, trailer
Electrically adjustable driver’s seat; fuel-filler flap
6
7,5 Driver seat memory; mirrors memory; sunroof; park-
ing assistant; seatbelt reminder
6B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
Car care and technical information
27
28
29
30
31
10
Engine-management system; SID; main instrument
7.5 Airbag
A
7.5 ABS/TCS/ESP
7.5 Starter motor
C1
L1
C2
L2
B
D
G
7.5 Cruise control; water valve; fog lights, front; rain sen-
sor
E
H
K
F
I
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
15
Ventilated front seats
7.5 Direction-indicator switch
J
30
Cigarette lighter (front/rear)
Daytime running light
Electric windows, left
Windshield wipers
15
30
30
30
20
Electric heating, front seats
Relay panel under instrument panel (cont.)
Limp-home solenoid (automatic transmission);
OnStar; telematics
C2
D
E
–
–
Relay panel under instrument panel
Main relay (engine management system)
#
A
Function
F
Fuel filler flap
–
G
H
I
Fuel pump
B
Electric heating of rear seat
–
Ignition switch
C1
Rear-window / door mirrors heating
J
–
K
Starter relay
Limp-home function
Bootlid
L1
L2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 231
Fuse box under hood
Fuses
#
Amp Function
2
3
4
7
1
1
40 Radiator fan, high speed
60 ABS/TCS/ESP
2
3
6
8
5
–
–
1
2
9
10
14
11
15
12
16
4
7.5 Load angle sensor (cars with xenon headlights)
15 Heater
13
5
3
4
5
6
9
12
15
16
17
6
10 A/C; car alarm siren
15 Bulb test
7
8
10 13
11 14
17
7
8
–
–
9
20 Headlight washers
15 High beam headlight, left
15 Low beam headlight left
15 High beam headlight, right
15 Low beam headlight, right
30 Radiator fan, high speed
15 Fog lights (front spoiler)
30 Wiper, rear
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Relays
#
1
Function
Bulb test; head light; high beam flasher
Headlight washer
Front fog lights
2
3
4
Wiper, rear (9-5 Wagon)
–
5
15 Horn
6
–
–
–
7
Rain sensor
8
Radiator fan, low speed
Radiator fan, high speed
A/C-compressor
9
10
11
Radiator fan, high speed, right fan
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
Car care and technical information
12
13
14
15
16
17
Horn
Extra lights (accessory)
High beam headlight
Low beam headlight
–
Windshield wipers
Location of wallet for spare bulbs and
fuses (accessory)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 233
Adjust the tire pressure to match the current
load and speed of the car (see page 279).
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires
TheTire-LoadingInformationlabel,whichis
on the inside of the trunk lid, shows the cor-
rect inflation pressures for your tires when
they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has
been sitting for at least threehours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that
enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
you ever have questions about your tire
warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Saab Warranty and Service Record
Booklet for details.
The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
i.e. tires that are the same temperature as
the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
increases as the tires become warm (e.g.
during highway driving) by approximately
0.3 bar (4 psi). When thetemperatureof the
tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-
sure will change 0.1 bar (2 psi).
WARNING
Neverreducethepressureofahottire. Ifthe
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Poor maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Bad wear
• Bad handling
• Bad fuel economy
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and
aseriousaccident. See“LoadingYour
Vehicle” on page 242.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resultingaccidentcouldcauseserious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact – such as when you hit a pot-
hole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
yourtreadisbadly worn, or if yourtires
have been damaged, replace them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
Car care and technical information
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
ontheTire-LoadingInformationlabel. Make
certain that all wheel nuts are properly tight-
ened. See page 250.
When to check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
Flat spotting
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
or when the car is driven hard. After the car
has been parked with hot tires and the tires
havecooleddown,aflatspotcanforminthe
tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
The same can occur if the car has not been
moved for a long time.
Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
felt through the steering wheel, similar to
that experiencedwhenthewheels needbal-
ancing.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to
check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems. They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See “Changing a wheel” on
page 247.
Flat spots of this type disappear once the
tiresgethotagain,usuallyafter10–15 miles
(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles
(12 500 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
New Tires” on page 235 and “Wheel
Replacement” on page 238 for more infor-
mation.
Thepurposeofregularrotationistoachieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehi-
cle. The first rotation is the most important.
When rotating your tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left
rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to
right rear. Right rear to left front.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 235
When It Is Time for New Tires
Buying New Tires
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is
tocheckthetreadwearindicators, whichwill
appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
To find out what kind and size of tires you
need, look at the Tire-Loading Information
label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it
was new had a Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) number on each
tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get
ones with that same TPC Spec number.
That way your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give proper endur-
ance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride
and other things during normal service on
yourvehicle. Ifyour tires haveanall-season
tread design, the TPC number will be fol-
lowed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not
havingaTPCSpecnumber,makesurethey
are the same size, load range, speed rating
and construction type (bias, bias-belted or
radial) as your original tires.
If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than
those supplied with the car, consult your
Saab dealer first as to the possibilities
available.
Wheels/tires combinations that are not
approved by Saab can negatively affect the
car’s directional stability, steering and brak-
ing in both wet and dry conditions.
• You can see the indicators at three or
more places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing
through the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
Wear indicators
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
because of thesizeorlocationof the dam-
age.
Treadwear indicators
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only
2/32"(1.6 mm)oftreadremains. Assoonas
the indicators become visible, new tires
should be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations gov-
erning the use of winter (snow) tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
Car care and technical information
The wheels and tires have been carefully
matchedtothecharacteristicsofthecarand
play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-
ing and handling.
Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
combination will work in the best possible
way, just because it can be fitted to the car.
To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-
rate as possible it should be reprogrammed
if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
Contact a Saab dealer.
Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
tires on the same axle have the same
amount of tread.
NOTICE
WARNING
Always consult your Saab dealer before
changing the wheels and tires on your
Saab.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose con-
trol while driving. If you mix tires of differ-
ent sizes or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle prop-
erly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use
thesamesizeandtypetiresonallwheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, it was developed for
use on your vehicle. See “Compact spare
tire” on page 246.
Wide wheels and tires with sidewalls that
are too low can:
• be damaged in potholes etc.
• cause springs, shock absorbers and
wheel bearings and body mountings
can be overloaded.
• cause that the wheels can come into
contact with chassis and body compo-
nents.
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
standing upright.
• can affect the function of the Elec-
tronic Stability Program (ESP).
WARNING
The speed and load limits for the tires
must not be exceeded; see page 241.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.
The maximum permissible offset is
49 mm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 237
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and a half (1.5) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperaturegrades areA (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
tothegeneration of heatand itsability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-
ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For exam-
ple:
Treadwear 200TractionAA Temperature
A
The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States
National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion, which grades tires by treadwear, trac-
tion and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United
States.) The grades are molded on the side-
walls of most passenger car tires. The Uni-
form Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-pro-
duction tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary
withrespecttothesegrades, they mustalso
conform to federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire Perfor-
mance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance. Warn-
ing: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Warning:Thetemperaturegradeforthistire
is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, orexcessiveloading,
either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238
Car care and technical information
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give
you the longest tire life and best overall per-
formance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel bal-
ancing are not needed. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pull-
ing one way or the other, the alignment may
need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
WARNING
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Alwaysusethecorrectwheel, wheelbolts
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
used or how far it’s been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you
have to replace a wheel, use a new GM
original equipment wheel.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions
exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cool-
ing, speedometer or odometer calibra-
tion, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehi-
cle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a wheel” on page 247.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you
need.
WARNING
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
offset and be mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheelboltsorwheelnuts, replacethemonly
with new Saab original equipment parts.
This way, you will be sure to have the right
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
vehicle.
When fitting just one new pair of tires,
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
as these are more critical to the direc-
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 239
Notice: If your vehicle does not have
If a Tire Goes Flat
Tire Chains
P225/45R17 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you
must. Use only SAE Class ²S² type
chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the front tires and
tighten them as tightly as possible with
the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly
and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains
contacting your vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving too fast
or spinning the wheels with chains on
will damage your vehicle.
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while
you’re driving, especially if you maintain
your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But
ifyoushouldeverhavea“blowout”, hereare
a few tips about what to expect and what to
do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a
drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and
grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to main-
tain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts
much like a skid and may require the same
correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear
blowout, remove your foot from the acceler-
ator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
Itmaybeverybumpyandnoisy,butyoucan
still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off
the road if possible.
WARNING
IfyourvehiclehasP225/45R17sizetires,
don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough
clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or
othervehicleparts.Theareadamagedby
the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that manu-
facturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it’s con-
tacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your
wheels.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use your jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240
Car care and technical information
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
tires based on performance factors: tread-
wear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see “Uniform Tire
Quality Grading” on page 237.
Maximum ColdInflation Load Limit: Max-
imum load that can be carried and the max-
imum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pres-
sure see “Lowest recommended tire pres-
sure, cold tires” on page 279and “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 242.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded
into it´s sidewall.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example
of a typical passenger car tire size.
Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a partic-
ular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, con-
struction type and service description.
Department of Transportation (DOT):
The Department of Transportation (DOT)
code indicates that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation
Motor Vehicle Safety standards.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): The let-
ters and numbers following DOT code are
the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire was manu-
factured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire.
Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
P
215 / 55
R
16 93
H
|
|
|
|
|
|
f
|
a
b
c
d
e
g
a Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
b Tire Width
c Aspect Ratio
d Belt Rating
e Rim diameter
f Load range
g Speed rating
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States versionofa metric tiresizing system.
The letter “P” as the first character in the tire
size means a passenger vehicle tire engi-
neered to standards set by the U.S Tire and
Rim Association.
Tire Width: The three-digit number indi-
cates the tire section width in millimeters
from sidewall to sidewall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 241
Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indi-
cates the tire height-to-width measure-
ments. For example, if the tire size aspect
ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illus-
tration, it would meanthat the tire´s sidewall
is 55% as high as it is wide.
Tire markings
An example of the meaning of the different
markings in a tire size is given below for a
tire size of:
215/55 R16 93 V
Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter “R” means radial ply construction; the
letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply con-
struction; and the letter “B” means
215 Tire section width, mm
55 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
is 65 % of the section width
TIN-code
a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark
b Tire Size
R Radial ply
belted-bias ply construction.
16 Wheel rim diameter 15 in at bead
seats
Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Load range:Theload range representsthe
load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.
c Tire Type Code
d Date of Manufacture
93 Tire load code
V Speed marking
Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a
tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”.
Tyre load index
91 max 1366 lbs (615 kg)
93 max 1433 lbs (650 kg)
94 max 1477 lbs (670 kg)
Speed ratings
S up to 100 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 167 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
Car care and technical information
DOT Markings: A code molded into the
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety stan-
dards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanu-
meric designator which can also indentify
the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tirepressingoutwardoneachsquareinchof
thetire. Airpressureis expressedinpounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the com-
bined weight of optional accessories, for
example, automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and air conditioning.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 242.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s
height to its width.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the front axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle”
on page 242.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
therearaxle, see“LoadingYourVehicle”on
page 242.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other rein-
forcecing materials.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extendto the beads are laidat
alternate angles substantially less than 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: Theamount of air
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before
a tire have built up heat from driving. See
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 233.
Curb weight: This means the weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers
and cargo.
This is an example of what your vehicle´s
Tire-Loading Information/Certification label
might look like. It is located on the B-pillar
and shows how much weight your vehicle
may properly carry. The label tells you the
proper size, and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It
also gives you important information about
the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
CapacityWeight, andincludesthe weightof
all occupants, cargo and all nonfac-
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air
pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used
on light duty trucks and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
tory-installed options.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 243
Maximum Load rating: The load rating for
a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The
sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehi-
cle capacity weight; and production options
weight.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pres-
sure: The maximum cold inflation pressure
to which a tire may be inflated.
Normal occupant weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat mul-
tipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 242.
Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.
cle manufacturer´s recommended tire infla-
tion pressure shown on the tire placard, see
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 233 and
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 242.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Stan-
dards, a tire information system that pro-
vides consumers with ratings for a tire´s
traction, temperature and treadwear. Rat-
ings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The
rating are molded into the sidewall of the
tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on
page 237.
VehicleCapacityWeight:Isthenumber of
designated seating positions multipled by
150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo
load. See “Loading Your Vehicle” on page
242.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load
on an individual tire due to curb weight,
accessory weight, occupant weight and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
attached to a vehicle showing original
equipment tire size and the recommended
cold inflation pressure. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” on page 242.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are
terline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated.
tread and the bead.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seat-
ing positions.
Speed rating: An alphanumeric code
assigned to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and
the road surface. The amount of grip pro-
vided.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
sometimes called “wear bars”, that show
across the tread of a tire when only
2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is
Time for New Tires” on page 235.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that facesoutward whenmounted on avehi-
cle. The sideof thetire that contains a white-
wall bears white lettering or bears manufac-
turer, brand and or model name molding on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
Car care and technical information
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
5 Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
Winter tires
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
winter climates where the majority of your
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
dealer can advise you of to the correct size
tire for your car (if different from the original
size) and also supply Saab approved winter
tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.
1 Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s
placard.
2 Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3 Substract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4 The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 245
Tire date code
Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods.Asthetiresage,therubberbecomes
progressively harder, and the roadholding
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-
ularly true on winter tires.
Tires now have a date-code marking for the
year of manufacture. The first two digits
denote the week number and the two last
digits the year. The ”<” symbol points to the
year.
Accordingly, a date code of 0200 signifies
that the tire was manufactured in week 02,
2000.
Tire date code
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246
Car care and technical information
Spare wheel (under panel in luggage
compartment)
Panel hooked back, 9-5 Sedan
Hanging up the cover and spare wheel
compartments mats, 9-5 Wagon
The spare tire, together with the jack, front
towrope attachment eye and toolkit, is
stowed away underneath a panel in the lug-
gage-compartment floor. The jack handle is
kept in a cover beside the spare tire.
If you need to change a wheel, remove the
tool kit first and then the spare tire.
The panel over the spare tire can be held
open by hooking the handle onto the rubber
seal.
In the Saab 9-5 Sedan the warning triangle
issecuredtotheluggagecompartmenttrim.
In the Saab 9-5 Wagon, there is space for a
warningtriangleunderneaththepanelinthe
luggage compartment floor.
NOTICE
Compact spare tire
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the tire. Its use is
only permittedwhen astandard tirehas sus-
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the
tire is only 2000 miles (3,500 km).
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel it can be placed outside up in the
spare-wheel well but only while driving to
the closest dealer.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 137 and 140.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
The compact spare should be inflated to
60 psi (420 kPa). Carry the puncturedtirein
the spare-wheel well under the luggage-
compartment floor.
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
as soon as possible (see also page 187).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 247
Changing a wheel
WARNING
• Stow the jack in the place provided for
it under the panel in the floor of the
trunk.Secureitproperlytoavoidinjury
to passengers in the event of a crash.
• The car jack is designed solely for use
in changing a wheel or fitting snow
chains. It must not be used to sup-
port the car during repair work or
servicing.
• Do not use the jack for any purpose
other than for jacking up the car.
• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threadsofthewheelboltsifthecarhas
been driven for several years exclu-
sively with alloy wheels.
If steel wheels are now fitted, the bolt
hole threads in the brake hubs should
be cleaned before the thinner steel
wheels are fitted. It may otherwise not
be possible to achieve the required
clamping force despite tightening the
bolts to the correct torque.
• Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack.
• Special caremust be takenif the car is
on a slope – use wheel chocks!
• Position chocks, one ahead and one
behind, the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the one to be changed.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights if
the car is on a road.
• Apply the parking brake and leave the
car in gear (1st or reverse). Automatic
transmission: move selector to the
P position.
• Ensure thateverybodyisout of the car
before jacking it up.
• Never start the engine while the car is
jacked up.
• The jack must stand on a firm, level
surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
Car care and technical information
Jack location, between spare wheel and
sill
Position for jack
The collapsible jack handle is stowed in a cloth bag by the spare wheel. With the help of
your foot, extend the handle as illustrated
Positioning the jack
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 249
To jack up the car, apply the jack to one of
the special jacking points under the sills.
If a floor jack is used, it can be applied to the
standard jacking points used by the dealer.
A floor jack can lift both front wheels or both
rear wheels off the ground simultaneously.
A jack stand must then be applied under-
neath the front of the engine subframe (at
the fixing point for the towrope-attachment
eye) or to the rear towrope-attachment eye
(or under the trailer hitch, if fitted).
NOTICE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated on the body.
Jacking points for a trolley jack
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250
Car care and technical information
NOTICE
• When refitting wheel covers (where
applicable), make sure that the valve
protrudes through the marked hole in
the wheel cover.
• Do not overtighten the bolts using an
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also
make it impossible to undo the bolts
using the wheel wrench in the car’s
toolkit.
Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-
faces between the wheel and brake disc
Do not wipe away the grease in the hub.
8 Check-tightenthewheelboltsafterafew
miles.
Tightening torque
disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
hub.
6 Fitthewheelandscrewintheboltsinthe
sequence shown (opposite pairs).
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
7 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to the correct torque in the
sequence shown (opposite pairs).
Tightening torque
1 Put the car in 1st gear (automatic trans-
mission:moveselectortothePposition)
and apply the parking brake.
2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the recess in the
sill.
Make sure that the jack fully engages
the recess in the sill and that the base of
the jack is steady and flat on the ground.
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
3 Remove the wheel cover (where appli-
cable).
Loosen the wheel bolts by half a turn.
4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
theground.Removethewheelboltsand
lift off the wheel.
5 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
surfaces between the wheel and brake
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Do not overtighten the bolts using an
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also make
it impossible to undo the bolts using the
wheel wrench in the car’s toolkit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 251
I
0
I5B39
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts
Removing the wheel cover
WARNING
Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threads if the car has been driven for sev-
eral years exclusively with alloy wheels.
Ifsteelwheels arenow fitted, the bolt hole
threads in the brake hubs should be
cleaned before the thinner steel wheels
are fitted. It may otherwise not be possi-
bletoachievetherequiredclampingforce
despite tightening the bolts to the correct
torque.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
Car care and technical information
Fault diagnosis
Maintenance
Air conditioning
(ACC)
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
a number of checks you can perform your-
self. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
• The drive belt for the compressor should
be inspected under the regular service
program.
• Clean dirt and insects away from the con-
denser and radiator to prevent clogging.
When washing the car, use the hose to
spraytheradiatorandcondenser(located
forward of the radiator) from both sides
(both from the front of the car and from
inside the engine bay). Do not use a pres-
sure washer.
Caution: Do not use the hose when the
engine is hot.
Otherthaninextremelycoldweather,donot
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
WARNING
Important!
• AllrepairsandadjustmentsontheA/C
system must be carried out by a Saab
dealer authorized for this kind of work.
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets
underneath the floor of the car in the vicinity
of the front doors. It is therefore perfectly
normal for water to be seen dripping from
these outlets when the car is parked. The
warmer the ambient air and the higher the
humidity, the greater will be the amount of
condensation formed.
• The A/Csystemispressurized. Do not
break any connections or undo A/C
system components.
• Escaping refrigerant gas can cause
visual impairment or other injury.
Inadequate cooling:
Note: The A/C system will only operate
when the outdoor temperature is above the
freezing point (0°C, 32°F).
NOTICE
a Check that the condenser (forward of
the radiator) has not become clogged
with dirt and insects.
• The A/C system is designed for use
with R134a refrigerant.
b Makesure thatthe drive belt for thecom-
pressor is not slipping.
c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor.
• Refrigerant handling requires special
equipment and special procedures for
charging and draining the system.
• Never mix R134a and R12 refriger-
ants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 253
Cleaning and caring for leather
upholstery
Safety belts
Upholstery and trim
To remove fluff or hairs from the seat uphol-
stery or headlining, use a moist, lint-free
cloth or a special lint remover (brush or
roller). Remove any dirty marks using a
cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
water.
The principal reason for treating leather
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-
ance and to provide it with a protective film.
Discoloration caused by dust and wear
mainly affects the lighter shades, although
this is not detrimental to the leather –
indeed,thepatinaresultingfromuseisoften
considered desirable in leather. But if the
leather is allowed to become too grubby, it
can start to look shabby.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other com-
ponents must be inspected by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
When using a stain remover, always work
from the outside towards thecenter to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
remain, it can usually be removed using
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself.
It is a good idea to clean and recondition the
leather twice a year – in conjunction with a
generalspring-cleaningofthecar–afterthe
winter and in the autumn, for instance. In
hot, dry climates, the leather will need to be
treated more frequently. Recommended
conditioner – Saab Leather Care Lotion.
Do not use unknown harsh polishing
agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse
soap or hot water.
Regularly check the function of the safety
belts as follows:
Wetpatchesleft by spilt softdrinks or thinoil
must be wiped off immediately using an
absorbent material, such as kitchen paper,
and treated with stain remover.
Alcohol is recommended for removing
grease or oil stains, and a semi-stiff brush
may also be used.
• Hold the diagonal strap and pull itsharply.
The safety belt should lock and it should
not be possible to withdraw it further.
Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
There must be no frayed threads in the web-
bing.
Safety belts must not come intocontactwith
substances such as polishes, oils or other
chemicals. If the straps aredirty, washthem
with warm water and a detergent or have
them replaced.
Textile carpeting
Vacuum clean the carpeting regularly. Car-
pets can also be cleaned using a brush, or
carpet shampoo applied with a sponge. Do
not use vacuum cleaners outdoors unless
they are properly grounded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254
Car care and technical information
The underside of the car also needs wash-
ing regularly, and this should be done extra
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
undersideofthecar byhand if the caris usu-
ally washed in an automatic car wash with-
out special facilities for underbody cleaning.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks.
Cleanthewindowglassinsideandoutusing
a high quality window cleaner. This is partic-
ularly important when the car is new, as
upholstery and trim have a tendency to
sweat a little at first.
Keeptheglasswellcleaned, as this helps to
prevent misting.
Washing the car
NOTICE
Wash your car frequently. To facilitate
cleaning, a suitable detergent canbeadded
to the water, which should be lukewarm.
• The door mirrors must be fully
retracted before the car enters an
automatic car wash.
Do not use a pressure washer at close
range on stone chip damage, scratches or
other damage to the paintwork. The paint
can otherwise start to flake.
Remove any bird droppings without delay,
as these can discolor the paintwork and
prove difficult to polish out.
Use a soft cloth moistened with methyl alco-
hol to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do
not use strong cleaners, as these can dry
out the paintwork.
• Remove fixed antennas, e.g. for
mobile phone, before putting car
through an automatic car wash.
• Tryyourbrakesonleavingacar wash.
Wet brake discs may reduce the per-
formance of the brakes.
• Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:
Do not spray the sensors or closer
than 20 cm to the sensors with a pres-
sure washer, as this can damage
them.
NOTICE
Avoid using any alcohol-based cleaners
on the front and rear light clusters, as
these can cause cracking of the lenses.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 255
If corrosion has already set in, e.g. as a
Waxing and polishing
Touching up the paint
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-
ble, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
then be primed with two thin coats of primer
applied by brush.
Other than in exceptional cases, do not use
abrasivepolishescontainingacuttingagent
on a new car. Always wash the car thor-
oughly before waxing or polishing.
Damaged paintwork should be treated as
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
the greater the risk of corrosion. The
anti-perforation warranty does not cover
corrosion resulting from untreated defects.
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
usually extensive and can only be properly
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches
and stone-chip damage yourself. The nec-
essary tools and materials, such as primer,
touch-up paint and brushes, are available
from your Saab dealer.
Engine compartment
Aftertheprimerhasdried,applyseveralthin
layers of topcoat enamel until the surface of
the repaired area is flush with the surround-
ing paintwork.
Stir both primer and touch-up enamel thor-
oughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.
Clean the engine compartment using an
engine detergent and rinse with hot water.
Cover the headlights. Do not use high-pres-
sure washer. Avoid spraying the hood liner,
as this can become heavy and hang down
and touch the engine when the hood is
closed.
Do not use gasoline as a cleaning agent or
solvent when carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-
ronmentally safe degreasing agents.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
Car care and technical information
Two-coat enamel
Anti-corrosion
treatment
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
applied in two operations. The first coat, the
base color, contains the pigment, metal
flakesandbinder. Thesecondcoatconsists
of a clear enamel, which provides the final
gloss for the paintwork and protects the
base from moisture and environmental con-
taminants.
The entire car is corrosion-protected at the
factory in different stages by an electrolytic
immersion coating and a PVC-based pro-
tective coating to protect against corrosion
caused by stones flung up by the wheels. A
thin penetrating anti-rust oil is also applied
in cavities and body members.
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
In addition to conventional anti-corrosion
treatment like painting, underbody treat-
ment and cavity treatment, most of the body
panel surfaces are galvanized. These
include the hood, the doors and the under-
body.
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
2 Apply the primer, base color and finally,
the enamel. To achieve the best finish,
apply two or three coats of primer.
I
Surface-treatment composition
1 Body panel
2 Zinc (certain panel sections only) 7.5 µm
3 Phosphate coating
The anti-corrosion treatment on the under-
side of the car and inside the wheel arches
isparticularlyexposedtoconstantwearand
possible damage, the degree of which will
obviously depend on driving conditions.
4 Cathodic ED 23 µm
5 Intermediate coat 35 µm
6 Metallic base 15 µm
7 Clear enamel /solid enamel 40 µm
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 257
2 Clean the underside of the car during
What causes rust?
Preventive maintenance
the winter. Use high pressure water to
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture
manage to penetrate the protective finish,
and body panels may rust through if the pro-
cess is unchecked. Rusting can occur wher-
ever water is trapped or where the car’s
panels are continuously damp. Damage to
paint and undercoating by stones, gravel
and minor crashes immediately exposes
metal to air and moisture. Road salts used
for de-icing will collect on the bottom of the
car and promote rusting. Areas of the coun-
try with high humidity have great potential
for rust problems, especially where salt is
used on roads or there is moist sea air.
Industrial pollution (fallout) may also
The following procedures are necessary to
help protect against rusting. Refer also to
the terms and conditions of the Sheet Metal
Coverage described in the warranty book-
let.
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
wheel wells) at least at mid- winter and
in the spring.
3 Inspect the car frequently for leaksor
damage, and arrange for needed
repairspromptly. Afterwashingorafter
heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-
ing the car inspect body surfaces for
paint damage. While checking for leaks,
lift the floor mats and check beneath
them. Water can collect in these areas
and remain for prolonged periods. Dry
any wet areas including the floor mats.
Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
Use touch-up paint to repair small
scratchesorminorfinishdamage. Areas
where metal is exposed will rust quickly
and MUST be repaired immediately by
touch-up or professional repainting.
Rust must be removed, the bare metal
primed and painted. Major body
damageshouldberepairedimmediately
and new panels or exposed areas
should be undercoated with anti- corro-
sion material.
1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
least twice a year. Under adverse con-
ditions, where there is a rapid buildup of
dirt, sand or road salt, wash your car at
least once a week. After extreme expo-
sure to salted snow or slush, evidenced
by a white film on the car, wash the car
immediately. Frequent washing will pre-
vent paint damage from acid rain and
other airborne contaminants such as
tree sap and bird droppings. If any of
these contaminants are noticed on the
car the finish should be washed immedi-
ately.
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
with water to loosenandflush off heavy
concentrations of dirt (include the
underbody).
• Sponge the car with a solution of either
a good quality car soap or mild general
purpose (dish washing) detergent and
water.
damage paint and promote rusting.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s
responsibilityandarenot coveredunder
warranty.
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
• After washing, check and clear all
drains in doors and body panels.
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258
Car care and technical information
4 Inspect the undercoating and touch
up if necessary. Pay particular atten-
tion to the fenders and wheel housings,
which are exposed to abrasion by flying
gravel, etc. If the composition has worn
or flaked off, the steel must be thor-
oughly cleaned and dried before a fresh
coat is applied. The cleaning is best
done with a scraper and a steel wire
brush, followed by washing with solvent.
Apply the new coating thinly, as other-
wise it may run off or fall off when dry.
For long trips
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials
Before setting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car checked over by
your Saab dealer.
A typical car consists of metals (65–75 %),
plastics (10–15 %), rubber (5 %) and small
quantities of glass, wood, paper and tex-
tiles. The recycling of metals has been com-
monplace for a long time now.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a Poly-V-belt and the like.
You can check some points yourself before-
hand:
To facilitate sorting of other materials for
recycling, plastic parts, for instance, have
been marked to identify the precise nature
of the plastic.
The quantity of materials in the car that can
be recycled or recovered depends on the
scrappingfacilitiesindifferentcountries.EU
legislation that comes into force in 2006 will
require a minimum of 85 % of the total
weight of materials to be recycled. How-
ever, every major car salvage yard in each
market willreceive detailsfromSaabofhow
the highest percentage of materials can be
reclaimed.
• Make sure that the engine is in good con-
dition.
• Check that no oil or gasoline leaks out of
the engine or gearbox/transmission.
• Check the coolant and power steering
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
• Inspect the Poly-V-belt and replace it if it
shows any signs of hard wear.
• Check the battery charge.
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
wheel.
• Check the brakes.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and
the jack in the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 259
To check the aim, the vehicle should be
• The vehicle should be fully assembled
andallotherworkstoppedwhileheadlight
aiming is being done.
• The vehicleshould not have anysnow, ice
or mud attached to it.
• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
pressure.
• Close all doors.
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
sion.
Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
are aimed properly.
Headlight aiming
properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle shall be placed so that the
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall or other flat surface. The
aiming area should be darkened, this will
improveyourabilitytoseethebeam ofthe
low beam headlight being aimed.
• The vehicle must have all four wheels on
a perfectly level surface which is level all
the way to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is per-
pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.
WARNING
Before checking/adjusting the headlight
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
dangeroffingersandhandsbeinginjured
by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
aiming system equipped with vertical
aiming device. The aim has been preset at
the factory and should normally not need
further adjustments.
If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
the headlight aim may be affected. If you
believe your headlights need to be
re-aimed, we recommend that you take it to
your Saab dealer for service, however, it is
possibleforyoutore-aimyourheadlightsas
described in the following procedure.
NOTICE
To make sure that your headlights are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
headlight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260
Car care and technical information
1
2
4
3
I
I
Vertical aiming device
1 Wall or garage door
2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches for vehicles with halogen lamps and
3 inches for vehicles with xenon lamps.
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-
Aiming marker on headlight lens
4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
from the ground to the recorded dis-
tance(seepoint4)anddrawahorizontal
line the width of the vehicle.
ment follow these steps:
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
aiming device.
2 Locate the marker on the lens.
3 Measurethedistancefromthegroundto
the aim marker on each lens.
Subtract 2 inches if the vehicle is
equipped with halogen lamps, record
this distance.
Subtract 3 inches if the vehicle is
equipped with xenon lamps, record this
distance.
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care and technical information 261
I
I
Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface
Correctly adjusted low beam
5 Turn on the low beam headlights and
place a piece of cardboard or equivalent
(althoughnotdirectlyonthelens)infront
of the headlight not being aimed. This
should allow the beam cut-off of the
headlight being aimed to be seen on the
flat surface.
6 Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
horizontal cut-off of the headlight is
aligned with the horizontal line on the
wall.
NOTICE
Do not cover a headlight directly on the
lens to improve beam cut-off when aim-
ing. Covering a headlight may cause
excessiveheatbuild-upwhichmaycause
damage to the headlight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262
Car care and technical information
(This page has been left blank)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance and Information 263
Customer
Assistance and
Information
Maintenance schedule _
Owner assistance _____
264
265
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S.A.)_____________
266
266
267
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government _________
Vehicle Data Collection
and Event Data
Recorders __________
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264
Customer Assistance and Information
Service intervals
Engine oil and filter changes
Changingtheengineoilandfilterisrequired
at every service point. Use only a Saab
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
stated in the Specification section of this
Owner’s Manual. The use of extra additives
in the oil is not necessary and is not recom-
mended, and may be harmful to turbocharg-
ers.
Maintenance schedule
The maintenance schedule is comprised of
a Check -up 30 days after retail delivery, fol-
lowed by services at every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) thereafter (15,000, 30,000,
45,000 miles/24,000, 48,000, 72,000 km
etc.).
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
service program to the purchaser/operator
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
to ensure the proper emission control sys-
tems function, safety and reliability of the
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
maintenance is recommended for specific
componentswhenthecarisoperatedunder
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-
nance is always good advice!
NOTICE
More frequent oil changes are recom-
mended if your vehicle is operated under
the following conditions:
The Check-up will be done by your Saab
dealer at no charge and should be done
as close as possible to the scheduled 30
days.
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,
throughtheirfranchiseagreement,toattend
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and
replacement parts.
Today’s complex automobiles should only
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
serviceprofessionals. ASaabdealerisyour
best choice.
• Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to
16 km). This is particularly important
when outside temperatures are below
freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such
as frequent stop-and-go driving).
• Most trips are through dusty areas.
• Youfrequentlytowatraileroruseacarrier
on top of your vehicle.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
police, taxi or other commercial applica-
tions.
If your driving habits match this description,
have the engine oil and filter changed in-
between normal services at 7,500 mile
(12,000 km) intervals. The Warranties and
Service Record Booklet has provisions to
record extra oil changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance and Information 265
Service record retention
Service costs
Owner assistance
Service instruction coupons and record
stubs are provided in the Saab Warranties
and Service Record Booklet which accom-
panies this Owner’s Manual. The coupons
are arranged in the order that normal ser-
viceshouldbeperformed. Theedgeofeach
coupon is shaded to correspond to the type
of service point:
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
vice times for each service point do not
include the labor required to replace wear
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
repairs found to be necessary as a result of
the inspections included in these times.
Additional labor and parts will be charged
for such work when necessary, except as
covered under anapplicableSaab warranty
or any optional extended service contract.
Transmission fluid changes or suspension
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
tional.
Warranties and service problem
assistance
For complete information about all applica-
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab
RoadsideAssistance. Ifthebookletislostor
misplaced, a new one may be ordered
through a Saab dealer or by contacting
Saab.
• Striped – "Check Up"
• Blue – Oil change/inspection service
• Black – Major service
Note that in Canada a combined service
and warranty book is used, but not service
coupons.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Thetoll-freenumbertocallfromall50states
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.
Dealer charges for general shop material,
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
clingexpensesorotheroperationcostsmay
also be applied to service and repair
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
locality.
When scheduled services are performed,
your dealer will tear out the applicable
coupon and use it to check off the opera-
tions performed and enter it into the service
file at the dealership. The servicing dealer’s
stamp, along with the date and mileage at
which the service was done, should be
entered on the corresponding stub which
remains in your booklet. The booklet is your
permanent record of the services per-
formed. It also includes a log sheet for
unscheduled repairs.
It is advisable to retain receipts and, if pos-
sible, copies of shop work orders for all ser-
vice and repair work, wherever performed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266
Customer Assistance and Information
Change of Address Notification
(U.S. and Canada)
Reporting Safety
Defects (U.S.A.)
Reporting Safety
Defects to the Canadian
government
Two change of address cards are provided
at the end of the Warranties and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
address allows Saab to contact you in the
event of a recall or service campaign.
Please help us keep our records up to date
for your own peace of mind.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
If you live in Canada, and believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in
addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
Service information
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
mayopenaninvestigation, andifitfindsthat
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-
9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
ofTransportation,Washington,D.C.20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
You may write to Transport Canada at Box
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you
will notify us. In Canada, please call our
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at
1-800-263- 1999.
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-5
car line can be ordered through the dealer.
These are comprehensive manuals on CD
rom, geared to use by professional techni-
cians.
Consult your Saab dealer for prices and for
a listing for your model.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance and Information 267
To read this information, special equipment
Please check the OnStar subscription ser-
vice agreement or manual for information
on its operations and data collection.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
is needed and access to the vehicle or the
SDM is required. Saab will not access infor-
mation about a crash event or share it with
others other than
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehi-
cles, has a number of sophisticated com-
puter systems that monitor and control sev-
eral aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicleuses on-board vehicle comput-
erstomonitoremissioncontrolcomponents
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor condi-
tions for airbag deployment, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver con-
trol the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Someinformation may bestoredduringreg-
ular operations to facilitate repair of
(a) with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
the lessee,
(b) in response to an official request of
police or similar government office,
(c) as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process, or
(d) as required by law.
In addition, once Saab collects or receives
data, Saab may
(a) use the data for GM research needs,
(b) make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be main-
tained and need is shown, or
(c) share summary data which is not tied to
a specific vehicle with non-Saab organiza-
tions for research purposes.
detected malfunctions; other information is
stored only in a crash or near crash event by
computer systems commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer
systems, such as the Airbag Sensing and
Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition
ofthevehicleandhowitwasoperated, such
as engine speed, throttle position, vehicle
speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness,
airbag performance data, and the severity
of acollision. These data havebeen used to
improve vehicle crash performance and
may be used to improve crash performance
of future vehicles and driving safety. These
on-board systems are somewhat like the
data recorders on many airplanes, but they
do not record sounds, such as conversation
of vehicle occupants.
Others, suchaslawenforcement, mayhave
access to the special equipment that can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or SDM.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268
Customer Assistance and Information
(This page has been left blank)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 269
Specifications
General______________
Engine ______________
Fuel_________________
Engine oil____________
Engine variants _______
Electrical system______
Drive belts ___________
Manual gearbox_______
Automatic transmission
Suspension __________
Steering _____________
Brake system_________
Wheels and tires ______
Plates and labels______
270
272
272
273
274
275
275
276
276
277
277
277
278
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270
Specifications
General
Gross vehicle weight
(GVW)
Overall length, including bumpers:
Maximum train
weight
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 190.0 in (4827 mm)
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 190.1 in (4828 mm)
Overall width, including door mirrors ____ 80.4 in (2042 mm)
Maximum height:
(GVW + max. trailer
weight)
Maximum axle load,
front
Maximum axle load,
rear
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 58.1 in (1475 mm)
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 59.1 in (1501 mm)
Wheelbase _______________________ 106.4 in (2703 mm)
Permissible load (in addition to driver) = GVW minus curb weight
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
Ground clearance __________________ approx. 6.6 in
(167 mm)
Chassis number in engine bay
Track:
Weight ready for driving (i.e. with full fuel
Front __________________________ 59.9in(1522mm)*)
Rear ___________________________ 59.9in(1522mm)*)
Turning circle (curb to curb) ___________ 37,1 ft (11.3 m)
tank, washer-fluid reservoir, standard
3460–3780 lbs.
tools and spare wheel) ______________ (1570–1715 kg)
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ___________ 4390–4710 lbs.
(1990–2135 kg)
Turning circle (measured at vehicle extrem-
ities) ___________________________ 39,0 ft (11.9 m)
Maximum axle load:
Number of seats (incl. driver) _________
5
Front ___________________________ 2590 lbs. (1175 kg)
Rear, 9-5 Sedan___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
Rear, 9-5 Wagon __________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Weight distribution:
*) Specified track applies to wheel sizes:
6 x 15 & 6.5 x 16
Curb weight, front/rear ______________ 60/40 %
GVW, front/rear ___________________ 50/50 %
Maximum roof load __________________ 220 lbs (100 kg)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 271
Trailer:
Luggage compartment
Volume (SAE):
Maximum towing speed, trailer with brakes 60 mph (100 km/h)
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 15.9 cu.ft.
(450 litres)
Trailer with brakes _________________ Maximum weight:
3500 lbs (1588 kg)
9-5 Wagon, rear seat upright ________ 31.4 cu. ft.
(890 litres)
Trailer without brakes ______________ Maximum weight:
1000 lbs (450 kg)
9-5 Wagon, rear seat folded _________ 73.0 cu. ft.
(2067 litres)
Maximum load on ball hitch __________ 110–165 lbs
(50–75 kg)
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Sedan:
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that local restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
weights (see page 178).
Rear seat upright _________________ 43.0 in (1092 mm)
Rear seat folded down _____________ 67.5 in (1714 mm)
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Wagon:
Rear seat upright _________________ 42.8 in (1087 mm)
Rear seat folded __________________ 61.2 in (1732 mm)
WARNING
• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
these.
• When carrying a load in the luggage compartment, make sure
that it is tied down securely, particularly when part or all of the
rear seat is folded down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272
Specifications
Engine
Fuel
4-cylinder ________________________ Four cylinders, twin
Fuel grade ________________________ Unleaded gasoline
AON 87–93.
overhead cam-
shafts, 16 valves
and two balancer
shafts.
The use of fuel with an octane rating lower than that
recommended can cause serious engine damage.
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mend the following fuel grades:
Cylinder bores ___________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)
Stroke ___________________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)
2.3t ____________________________ AON 90
2.3 T and 2.3Turbo ________________ AON 93 *)
Swept volume _____________________ 139.7 cu.in
(2.290 litres)
*) If AON 90 is used and the ambient temperature is above
77 – 86°F (25–30°C) some decrease in engine power canoccur
to some extent.
Idling speed _______________________ 825 rpm (man.)
860 rpm (aut.)
Antifreeze_________________________ Saab-approved
antifreeze
Fuel-tank capacity __________________ 18.5 gal. (70 litres)
Coolant capacity ___________________ 7.6 qts (7.4 litres)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 273
Engine oil
Recommended oil viscosities
Viscosity is a measurement of the oils thickness. The thickness
influences, among other things, the fuel economy. For best func-
tion Saab recommends:
To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all
engines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill
oils. Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental
issues are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved
by Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that
protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.
For gasoline engines, SAE 0W-30 engine oil.
Someoil companies have engineoils meeting our requirements
(GM-LL-A-025) but with other viscosities than what we recom-
mend as a first choice. Those engine oils are also accepted.
Approved oils:
All gasoline engines - Fully Synthetic Engine Oil fulfilling
GM-LL-A-025 requirements.
To ensure being able to take advantage of the Saab specified
service intervals, be sure to select a fully synthetic engine oil ful-
filling GM-LL-A-025 requirements.
Extra engine oil additives
Don't addanythingtoyour oil. Therecommendedoilsareallyou
will need for good engine performance and protection.
Servicing/Oil changes:
To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to
use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils
approved for your engine. Service should be done according
to the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's
function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not
take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to
neglecting to meet above mentioned requirements.
At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil
engine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to
meet your engines specific needs. We recommend that you,
with the help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil
from that selection.
Other oil companies also have engine oils approved according
to GM specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils will meet
your engines requirements. You should only use oil that meets
your engines specific requirements (GM-LL-A-025).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274
Specifications
Engine variants
When to change engine oil
Your vehicle will display when it is time for servicing on the SID,
based on the mileage and time since the last service.
Under normal circumstances the service indication will come
after:
up to 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 1 year.
For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that
the right engine oil is used.
2.3t Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________ 185 hp (136 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800 rpm ___ 206.5 ft.lb
(280 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1
Whenthemessagefor serviceisdisplayedyouneedtohave the
required service done as soon as possible.
After the service your service personnel will reset the service
indicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to
optimize the time to the next service.
2.3T Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 220 hp (161 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800 rpm____ 228.6 ft.lb
(310 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1
Oil capacity incl. filter (on changing) ____ 4.1 qts (4.0 litres)
2.3 Turbo Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 250 hp (184 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm
258.0 ft.lb.
(350 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 275
Electrical system
Drive belts
Voltage __________________________ 12 V
Battery capacity ___________________ 70 Ah
Starter motor ______________________ 1.4 kW
Alternator rating ____________________ 140 A/14 V
Firing order _______________________ 1–3–4–2
Spark plugs:
Engine variants
Outside length
Drive belt _________________________ 102.84 in
(2612 mm)
2.3t ____________________________ NGK
BCPR 6ES-11
Electrode gap ____________________ 0.0141 in (1.05 mm)
2.3T and 2.3 Turbo ________________ NGK
PFR 6H-10
Electrode gap ____________________ 0.0374 in (0.95 mm)
Drive belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276
Specifications
Manual gearbox
Automatic transmission
Type ____________________________ All-synchromesh
Type _____________________________ Electronically con-
5-speed with final
drive and differen-
tial
trolled 5-speed,
fully automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter, plane-
tary gear set and
integral final drive
Lock-up function in
selectorpositions3,
4 and 5.
Oil ______________________________ Saab MTF 0063
Oil capacity _______________________ 1.9 qts (1.8 litres)
Oil volume (on changing) ____________ 1.6 qts (1.5 litres)
Clutch type _______________________ Hydraulic, single
dry-plate clutch of
diaphragm-spring
type
Selector-lever positions ______________ P R N D M L
Transmission-fluid capacity, dry transmis-
sion (incl. torque converter and oil cooler) 7.5 qts (7 litres)
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 27–29 / 43–47
If fluid change required, approximately
3.5 litres can be drained through the drain
plug in the transmission casing
Transmission fluid ___________________ Saab 3309 (mineral
oil based)
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate
clutches, brake
bands and one-way
couplings
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 29–30 / 46–48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 277
Suspension
Brake system
Spring type, front and rear ___________ Coil springs
Maximum deflection of springs:
Footbrake (ABS) ____________________ Hydraulic, dual-cir-
cuit brake system.
Diagonally split cir-
cuit with vacuum
servo unit. Disc
brakes front and
rear.EBD,seepage
168.
Front __________________________ 7.09 in (180 mm)
Rear ___________________________ 7.87 in (200 mm)
Dampers, front and rear _____________ Gas-filled dampers
Steering
Handbrake ________________________ Acts on rear wheels
Brake fluid _________________________ DOT 4
Brake-fluid capacity _________________ 0.925 qts (900 ml)
Disc diameter:
Steering _________________________ Power-assisted
steering of
rack-and-pinion
type; telescopic
steering-column
shaft with universal
joints
Front, ventilated ___________________ 11.34 in (288 mm)
Front, ventilated, certain variants *) ____ 12.05 in (306 mm)
Rear, solid _______________________ 11.26 in (286 mm)
Rear, ventilated, certain variants *) ____ 11.81 in (300 mm)
Number of turns, lock to lock __________ 2,9
Power-steering fluid ________________ Power-steeringfluid
CHF 11S
*) 15” wheel must not be used on these
variants.
Total friction area of brake pads:
2
2
Front ___________________________ 36.3 in (234 cm )
2
2
Rear ___________________________ 15.5 in (100 cm )
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278
Specifications
Wheels and tires
(recommended dimensions)
Compact spare:
Wheel___________________________ 4 x 16
Tire_____________________________ T115/70 R16
Pressure_________________________ 60 psi (420 kPa)
2.3t
2.3 Turbo
2.3T
Summer tires
205/65 R15 94 V
215/55 R16 93 V
225/45 R17 94 W XL/RF
Winter tires
X
X
X
–
X
X
–
X
X
Maximum life _____________________ 2,200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed __________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
NOTICE
205/65 R15 94 Q
205/55 R16 91 Q
215/55 R16 93 Q
225/45 R17 94 Q XL/RF
Wheel sizes
6 x 15”
X
X
X
X
–
X
X
X
–
X
X
X
Snow chains:
Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
Wheels
Tires
6 x 15*)_____205/65 R15
X
X
X
–
X
X
–
X
X
6.5 x 16_____205/55 R16 M+S or
215/55 R16
6,5 x 16”
7 x 17”
Snow chains must not be fitted to 17" wheels.
15" wheels must not be fitted to the 2.3 Turbo and 2.3T since the size of
the brake discs prohibits this.
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Speed ratings and load indices, see page 241.
Always contact an authorized Saab dealer if you wish to fit other wheels
or tires than those fitted as standard.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for advice on snow chains.
NOTICE
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.
Wheel offset must be 49 mm.
Vehicles with 12.05 in (306 mm) front brake discs must not use
15” rims.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 279
Lowest recommended tire pressure, cold tires
1) Do not exceed posted speed limits.
Tire size
Load/speed
mph (km/h)
Front
Rear
1)
By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the surrounding
air temperature.
kPa/psi kPa/psi
205/65 R15 94 V
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 230/33 210/30
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 230/33 210/30
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 280/41 260/38
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 220/32
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 220/32
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 290/42 270/39
1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 250/36 240/35
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 250/36 240/35
1–5 pers./120– (190–) 300/43 290/42
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38
The values for tire pressure in the table above are for tires at 68°F (20°C).
The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during motor-
way driving), and decrease as they cool.
When the temperature of the tires increase or decrease by 10 degrees the
tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease by 10 kPa/2 psi
(0.1 bar).
215/55 R16 93 V
225/45 R17 94 W
XL/RF
205/65 R15 94 Q
Winter tire
for 2.3t
205/55 R16 91 Q
Winter tire.
All variants.
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38
215/55 R16 93 Q
Winter tire.
All variants.
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38
225/45 R17 94 Q
XL/RF
Winter tire.
All variants.
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 250/36 250/36
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 270/39 270/39
T115/70 R16
Spare wheel
Max 50 (80)
420/60 420/60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280
Specifications
Plates and labels
When consulting your Saab dealer, it may
be necessary to quote the car’s V.I.N.,
engine and gearbox numbers.
1 V.I.N. number, inside windshield.
2 Certification label.
3 Gearbox number.
4 Engine number.
5 USA: Label for color codes (trim and
body)
Canada: Label for tire pressure and
color codes (trim and body).
6 Chassis number plate.
7 Chassis number, stamped on body.
8 Vehicle Emission Control Information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications 281
position: 1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
6
|
7
|
8
|
9
|
10 11
12
|
|
|
V.I.N.:
Y
S
3
E
F
4
9
E
6
4
3
045842
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
2
3 4 5 6 = identification codes for certain chassis details
1 Region ___________ Y = Northern Europe
2 Country __________ S = Sweden
3 Manufacturer _____ 3 = Saab Automobile AB
4 Product line ______ E = 9-5
8 Engine variant _____ A = 2.3T
E = 2.3t
G = 2.3 Turbo
9 Check digit ________ 0–9/X
10 Model year ________ 4 = 2004
11 Factory ___________ 3 = Trollhättan
5 Model series ______ B = 9-5 Linear with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
12 Serial number ______
000001–999999
D = 9-5 Arc with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
H = 9-5 Aero with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
6 Body version _____ 4 = 4-door
5 = 5-door
7 Gearbox __________ 5 = Manual 5-speed
9 = Automatic 5-speed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282
Specifications
Saab Information Display:
Several of the systems in your Saab
car can be adjusted to better fit your
individual needs
Some functions are governed by legal
requirements and cannot therefore be
reprogrammed.
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for fur-
ther information.
Car alarm/central locking system:
Following adjustments can be done
by the driver:
• Outdoor temperature display can be
adjusted.
Miscellaneous:
Automatic Climate Control (ACC):
To alter the preprogrammed ”AUTO” start
upmodewithyourownpreferencesyoucan
manually select the desired settings for:
• Select the on-time for heated rear seat.
• Coolant temperature gauge adjustment
can be increased/decreased.
• Fuel level gauge adjustment can be
increased/decreased.
• Additional sweep of the wipers after wind-
shield washer function (ON or OFF).
• Followmehomeon-timecanvary from20
to 50 seconds.
• Night panel illumination deactivation
speed for the speedometer can be
adjusted.
• Temperature.
• Fan speed.
• Air distribution.
See ”Programming I” on page 81 and ”Pro-
gramming II” on page 82.
Saab 9-5 Audio System (see page 101):
• The sound level of the sirenwhen locking/
unlocking, HIGH or LOW.
• The number of blinks when locking/
unlocking, 1 to 7.
• Automatic locking of the trunk when the
carisdriven,1to8mph(2–14 km/h),YES
or NO.
• Preclude the unlocking of the trunk while
the car is driven, YES or NO.
• Maximum starting volume (when the
radio is switched on).
• Telephone volume (if the car is equipped
with a phone connected to the audio sys-
tem).
• Speed dependent volume (volume
increases or decreases with vehicle
speed).
• Automatic locking of the trunk after
1 second–4 minutes if it has not been
opened, YES or NO.
• Loudness.
Daytime Running Lights:
• Automatic locking of the trunk when it is
closed, YES or NO.
• Automatic locking of all doors when the
car is driven above 7.5 mph (12 km/h),
YES or NO.
To disable, turn off the ignition and pull out
fuse 35, see page 229.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 283
Automatic climate control (ACC) _____ 75
Automatic transmission, technical
data _________________________ 276
Aviod theft, tip __________________ 197
Carpeting, care of _______________ 253
Cassette player __________________ 92
Catalytic converter, important
Index
A
considerations _________________ 152
Central locking ___________________ 40
Change language in SID ___________ 68
Change of address notification _____ 266
Changing a wheel _______________ 247
Changing bulbs _________________ 215
Changing wiper blades ___________ 213
Charger/Jump starting ____________ 193
Charging the battery/Jump starting __ 193
Chassis number ________________ 280
Chassis number, key to ___________ 281
Checks before towing a camper or
trailer ________________________ 181
Child safety _____________________ 23
Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 43
Cleaning, engine bay _____________ 255
Clock _______________________67, 68
Color code, body ________________ 280
Color code, trim _________________ 280
Compact spare wheel ____________ 246
Compass ______________________ 126
Condensation, ACC _______________ 84
Coolant _______________________ 207
Courtesy Headlight Feature ________ 70
Cruise control __________________ 167
Cup holder _____________________ 134
A/C system, fault diagnosis _______ 252
A/C system, maintenance _________ 252
ABS brakes ____________________ 168
ACC __________________________ 75
ACC functions ___________________ 78
ACC, automatic climate control _____ 75
ACC, calibration _________________ 83
ACC, condensation _______________ 84
ACC, programming _______________ 81
ACC, useful tips _________________ 83
Adjusting the steering wheel _______ 120
Adjustment, seats ________________ 12
Air conditioning (A/C), fault diagnosis
B
Battery ________________________ 210
Battery charging/replacing ________ 211
Battery, boost starting ____________ 191
Before a long journey ____________ 258
Before towing a camper or trailer ___ 181
Belt guide ______________________ 17
Boost starting using jump leads ____ 191
Brake and clutch fluid ____________ 208
Brake-fluid reservoir _____________ 208
Brakes, technical data ____________ 277
Bulbs, changing ________________ 215
Bulbs, table of __________________ 226
Buying new tires ________________ 235
and maintenance ______________ 252
Air distribution, ACC ______________ 80
Airbag _________________________ 31
Alarm _________________________ 46
Alarm functions __________________ 49
Alarm signals ________________ 46, 49
Alternator _____________________ 212
Alternator drive belt __________ 212, 275
Alternator rating ________________ 275
Anticorrosion treatment ___________ 256
Antidazzle rear-view mirror ________ 125
Ashtrays ______________________ 131
Audio System ___________________ 85
Audio System, quick guide _________ 87
Autochecking of lights on starting ____ 60
C
CD changer _____________________ 97
CD player ______________________ 95
CHECK messages _______________ 67
CHECKING _____________________ 67
Calibration, ACC _________________ 83
Cancelling the programmed settings _ 81
Car alarm ______________________ 46
Car care ______________________ 199
Cargo net, 9-5 Wagon ____________ 142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284
Index
Engine bay ____________________ 201
Engine bay, cleaning _____________ 255
Engine number _________________ 280
Engine oil, grade ________________ 273
Engine, description ______________ 203
Engine, technical data ____________ 272
Engine, temperature gauge ________ 61
Engine-oil level, checking _________ 204
Event Data Recorder ____________ 267
Expansion tank, coolant __________ 207
D
G
DICE/TWICE ___________________ 228
Dampers ______________________ 277
Date code, tires _________________ 245
Definitions and terminology, tire ____ 242
Determining correct load, tires _____ 244
Dim-dipped beam ________________ 69
Direction indicators _______________ 71
Door handles ___________________ 40
Door mirrors ___________________ 121
Doors, locks & luggage compartment _ 39
Drive belt ______________________ 275
Drive belt, alternator _____________ 212
Drive belts, length _______________ 275
Driver’s seat, programmable ________ 14
Driving at night _________________ 185
Driving in hot weather ____________ 177
Driving with a load ______________ 185
Garage door opener _____________ 122
Gearbox number ________________ 280
Gearbox oil, checking ____________ 206
Gearbox, technical data, __________ 276
Glove compartment ______________ 132
H
Handbrake _____________________ 196
Hazard warning lights _____________ 72
Head restraint ___________________ 16
Headlight flasher _________________ 69
Headlights ______________________ 69
Hood _________________________ 200
Horn __________________________ 120
F
Fault codes, Audio System ________ 106
Flat spots, tires _________________ 234
Fluid level, automatic transmission __ 206
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan ___ 135
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon ___ 138
Frequently asked questions on airbag 37
Front fog lights __________________ 72
Frost warning ___________________ 64
Fuel __________________________ 154
Fuel consumption ________________ 63
Fuel filler door __________________ 146
Fuel gauge _____________________ 61
Fuel grade _____________________ 272
Fuse box under hood ____________ 231
Fuse panel ____________________ 227
Fuses ________________________ 227
I
If a tire goes flat _________________ 239
Ignition switch __________________ 148
Immobilizer _____________________ 41
Indicator and warning lights _________ 54
Indicator lights ___________________ 54
Instrument illumination ____________ 71
Instruments and controls ___________ 53
Interior equipment _______________ 119
Interior lighting __________________ 130
Interior rearview mirror ___________ 121
E
EDR _________________________ 267
ESP __________________________ 172
Electric heating seat ______________ 15
Electric heating, front seats ________ 15
Electric windows ________________ 127
Electrical system, technical data ____ 275
Electronic Stability Program, ESP __ 172
Electronic starting interlock _________ 41
Emergency operation of sunroof ____ 129
Emission control systems _________ 202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 285
J
N
Q
Jack _________________________ 249
New tires, buying _______________ 235
Night Panel _____________________ 67
Quality grading, tires _____________ 237
Questions on function of airbag ______ 37
Quick guide, Audio System _________ 87
K
O
Key ___________________________ 40
Key to chassis number ___________ 281
Key, remove ___________________ 148
R
Oil capacity, engine ______________ 272
Oil change, engine ______________ 204
Oil specification _________________ 272
OnStar ________________________ 107
Outdoor temperature ______________ 63
Owner assistance _______________ 265
Radiator fan ____________________ 212
Radio __________________________ 90
Rain sensor _____________________ 73
Rear fog light ____________________ 70
Rear seat, 9-5 Sedan, folding ______ 135
Rear seat, 9-5 Wagon, folding ______ 138
Rear-seat head restraints __________ 16
Rear-view mirror, antidazzle _______ 125
Rearview mirrors ________________ 121
Reclamation ___________________ 258
Recommendations for cars with
L
LATCH (child safety) ______________ 24
Labeling, tire sidewall ____________ 240
Labels __________________________ 7
Leather upholstery, care of ________ 253
Light horn ______________________ 69
Light switches ___________________ 69
Loading your vehicle _____________ 242
Luggage-compartment lighting _____ 130
P
Paintwork, touching-in ____________ 255
Parking Assistance ______________ 194
Parking lights ___________________ 69
Plates and labels ________________ 280
Poly-V-belt ____________________ 212
Power steering _________________ 209
Power-steering fluid _____________ 209
Pressure gauge __________________ 62
Programming I, ACC ______________ 81
Programming II, ACC _____________ 82
Programming the ACC ____________ 81
automatic transmission, towing a
camper or trailer _______________ 179
Refuelling _____________________ 154
Relay panel ____________________ 230
Remote control __________________ 40
Remote-control battery, changing ____ 43
Remove the key ________________ 148
Replacement, wheel _____________ 238
Reporting safety defects __________ 266
Reprogramming of systems _______ 282
Reservoir, power-steering fluid _____ 209
Rev counter _____________________ 60
Reversing lights __________________ 72
M
Main instrument panel ____________ 54
Main/dipped beam _______________ 69
Maintenance schedule ___________ 264
Maintenance, A/C-system _________ 252
Manual gearbox, technical data ____ 276
Maxi fuses _____________________ 228
Milometer ______________________ 60
Motoring abroad ________________ 258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286
Index
Roof load _____________________ 183
Running-in ____________________ 174
Starting in cold weather, ACC _______ 81
Starting in hot weather, ACC _______ 81
Steering wheel adjustment ________ 120
Steering, technical data __________ 277
Steps for determining correct load
limit _________________________ 244
Stone-chip damage, repairing ______ 255
Storage compartments ___________ 132
Sun visors _____________________ 131
Sunroof _______________________ 128
Suspension ____________________ 277
Suspension, technical data ________ 277
Switches _______________________ 69
Symboler ________________________ 9
Systems, adjustment _____________ 282
Tip, driving at night ______________ 185
Tip, to avoid theft ________________ 197
Tire chains _____________________ 239
Tire date code __________________ 245
Tire inspection and rotation ________ 234
Tire markings ___________________ 241
Tire pressure ___________________ 186
Tire sidewall labeling _____________ 240
Tire terminology and definitions ____ 242
Tire, compact spare ______________ 246
Tires _____________________233, 278
Tires, winter ____________________ 278
Tools _________________________ 145
Touching-in the paintwork _________ 255
Towbar attachment ______________ 178
Towbar load ____________________ 182
Towing the car __________________ 188
Towing, automatics ______________ 188
Traction _______________________ 171
Trailer weights __________________ 271
Treadwear indicators _____________ 235
Trionic ________________________ 202
Trip computer ___________________ 63
Trip meter ______________________ 60
Trunk _________________________ 135
Trunk lid, opening ________________ 44
Turbo gauge ____________________ 62
Turbo, points to note _____________ 151
S
SDM _________________________ 267
SID ___________________________ 63
Saab 9-5 Audio System ___________ 85
Saab Information Display (SID) _____ 63
Saab Parking Assistance _________ 194
Safety belts _____________________ 17
Safety belts, care of _____________ 253
Safety-belt pretensioners __________ 18
Safety-belt reminder ______________ 17
Seats __________________________ 12
Securing a load __________________ 44
Selector lever indication, automatic
T
transmission ___________________ 63
Sentronic, manual mode __________ 163
Service costs __________________ 265
Service information ______________ 266
Service intervals ________________ 264
Service record retention __________ 265
Settings, seats __________________ 12
Side airbags ____________________ 35
Signalling, horn _________________ 120
Sliding floor, 9-5 Wagon __________ 143
Snow chains ___________________ 176
Spare wheel ___________________ 246
Spare wheel and tools ___________ 145
Spark plugs ____________________ 275
Speedometer ________________ 60, 61
TCS OFF _______________________ 59
Table of fuses __________________ 229
Tachometer _____________________ 60
Tailgate, opening ________________ 44
Tank gauge _____________________ 61
Technical data __________________ 269
Telematics _____________________ 107
Temperature control, ACC _________ 77
Temperature gauge, engine ________ 61
Temperature zones, ACC __________ 77
Textile carpeting ________________ 253
Through-load hatch ______________ 137
Tie Downs _____________________ 137
Tightening torque, wheel studs _____ 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 287
U
W
Under the hood _________________ 201
Uniform tire quality grading ________ 237
Upholstery and trim ______________ 253
Upholstery and trim, care of _______ 253
Useful tips, ACC _________________ 83
Warning labels ___________________ 7
Warning light, AIR BAG ___________ 36
Warning lights ___________________ 54
Washers ______________________ 213
Washers, windshield _____________ 214
Washing the car ________________ 254
Waxing and polishing ____________ 255
Wear indicators, tires ____________ 235
Wheel replacement ______________ 238
Wheel, change _________________ 247
Wheels and tires ________________ 278
Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 278
When it is time for new tires _______ 235
Windshield washers ______________ 73
Windshield wipers ________________ 73
Winter tires ________________244, 278
Wiper blades, replacing __________ 213
Wipers and washers __________73, 213
V
Vanity mirrors __________________ 131
Vehicle Data Collection ___________ 267
Ventilated front seats _____________ 15
Viscosity, engine oil _____________ 272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288
Index
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|